Mercedes Benz 2007 Cls 550 Users Manual C219.boo

Mercedes-Benz-2007-Cls-Class-Owners-Manual-763348 mercedes-benz-2007-cls-class-owners-manual-763348

2015-02-05

: Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz-2007-Cls-550-Users-Manual-398099 mercedes-benz-2007-cls-550-users-manual-398099 mercedes-benz pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 481 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Sommer\ Corporat e\ Media\ AG
Bild in der Größe
215x70 mm einfügen
Operator’s Manual
CLS-Class
Order No. 6515 1422 13 Part No. 219 584 92 81 USA Edition B 2007
2195849281
CLS-Class
CLS 550
CLS 63 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demon-
stration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your
desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef-
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passen-
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
ment of time:
앫Please read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
앫Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are de-
signed to acquaint you with the opera-
tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
cupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 12
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada......................... 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting safety defects ................ 18
Vehicle data recording......................... 19
Information regarding electronic
recording devices........................... 19
At a glance .......................................... 21
Exterior view......................................... 22
Cockpit................................................. 24
Instrument cluster ................................ 26
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 28
Center console ..................................... 29
Upper part ...................................... 29
Lower part ...................................... 30
Overhead control panel ........................ 31
Storage compartments......................... 32
Door control panel................................ 34
Getting started ................................... 35
Unlocking ............................................. 36
Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 36
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 37
Starter switch positions.................. 38
Adjusting .............................................. 41
Seats .............................................. 41
Steering wheel................................ 44
Mirrors............................................ 46
Driving.................................................. 48
Fastening the seat belts ................. 48
Starting the engine ......................... 51
Parking brake ................................. 53
Driving off ....................................... 53
Switching on headlamps................. 55
Turn signals .................................... 55
Windshield wipers........................... 56
Problems while driving.................... 58
Parking and locking.............................. 59
Parking brake ................................. 59
Switching off headlamps................. 60
Turning off engine........................... 60
Releasing seat belts........................ 61
Locking........................................... 61
Contents
Safety and Security ........................... 63
Occupant safety................................... 64
Air bags .......................................... 66
Occupant Classification System
(USA only) ...................................... 71
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
system (Canada only)..................... 76
Seat belts ....................................... 78
Preventive occupant safety
(PRE-SAFE®) ................................... 82
Active head restraints .................... 83
Children in the vehicle.................... 84
Blocking of
rear door window operation ........... 89
Panic alarm .......................................... 90
Activating ....................................... 90
Deactivating ................................... 90
Driving safety systems......................... 91
ABS ................................................ 91
BAS ................................................ 92
Adaptive Brake............................... 93
EBP................................................. 93
ESP®............................................... 94
Anti-theft systems ............................... 99
Immobilizer .................................... 99
Anti-theft alarm system.................. 99
Controls in detail ............................. 101
Locking and unlocking ....................... 102
SmartKey ..................................... 102
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 105
Checking batteries in the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* .............................. 110
Loss of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 110
Opening the doors
from the inside............................. 111
Opening the trunk ........................ 112
Closing the trunk.......................... 113
Trunk emergency release ............. 116
Valet locking ................................ 117
Automatic central locking ............ 118
Locking and unlocking
from the inside............................. 118
Seats ................................................ 120
Front seat active head restraints . 120
Rear seat head restraints............. 120
Lumbar support ........................... 121
Multicontour seat*....................... 122
Seat heating*............................... 123
Seat ventilation* .......................... 124
Memory function ............................... 125
Storing positions into memory ..... 126
Recalling positions from memory. 126
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ........................... 127
Lighting ............................................. 128
Exterior lamp switch .................... 128
Combination switch ..................... 132
Corner-illuminating
front fog lamps* (CLS 550 with
Bi-Xenon* headlamps only).......... 132
Hazard warning flasher ................ 134
Interior lighting in the front.......... 135
Interior lighting in the rear ........... 136
Door entry lamps ......................... 137
Trunk lamp................................... 137
Contents
Instrument cluster ............................. 138
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination .................................. 138
Coolant temperature indicator..... 139
Resetting trip odometer ............... 139
Tachometer.................................. 139
Outside temperature indicator ..... 140
Control system .................................. 141
Multifunction display.................... 141
Multifunction steering wheel........ 142
Menus .......................................... 144
Standard display menu ................ 147
AMG menu ................................... 147
AUDIO menu ................................ 150
NAV* menu.................................. 152
Distronic* menu........................... 153
Vehicle status message
memory menu .............................. 153
Settings menu.............................. 154
Trip computer menu..................... 167
TEL* menu ................................... 168
Automatic transmission...................... 171
Gear selector lever........................ 171
Shifting procedure ........................ 172
Gear selector lever positions ........ 173
Driving tips.................................... 175
Gear ranges .................................. 176
Automatic shift program ............... 177
Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting................................... 178
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting* ................ 179
Manual shift program
CLS 63 AMG ................................. 181
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) ....................... 184
Good visibility..................................... 185
Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 185
Rear view mirrors.......................... 185
Sun visors ..................................... 187
Rear window sunshade* ............... 188
Rear window defroster.................. 189
4-zone automatic climate control....... 190
Deactivating the climate control
system.......................................... 195
Operating the climate control
system in automatic mode ........... 196
Setting the temperature ............... 197
Adjusting air distribution .............. 197
Adjusting air volume ..................... 198
Front defroster ............................. 199
Maximum cooling MAX COOL
(USA only)..................................... 200
Air recirculation mode .................. 200
Air conditioning ............................ 203
Residual heat and ventilation
(Canada only)................................ 203
Rear climate control ..................... 204
Front center console
storage compartment ventilation.. 206
Power windows .................................. 207
Opening and closing
the windows ................................. 207
Synchronizing power windows...... 209
Summer opening feature .............. 210
Convenience closing feature......... 210
Contents
Power tilt/sliding sunroof .................. 212
Opening and closing
the power tilt/sliding sunroof ...... 212
Synchronizing
the power tilt/sliding sunroof ...... 214
Driving systems ................................. 215
Cruise control............................... 215
Distronic*..................................... 218
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)........... 231
Parktronic system
(Parking assist)*........................... 235
Loading .............................................. 239
Roof rack*.................................... 239
Loading instructions..................... 239
Ski bag* (Canada only)................. 240
Cargo tie-down rings .................... 243
Retaining hooks............................ 243
Useful features .................................. 244
Storage compartments ................ 244
Cup holders.................................. 247
Ashtrays ....................................... 249
Cigarette lighter ........................... 250
Power outlets ............................... 251
Heated steering wheel
(Canada only) ............................... 252
Floormats..................................... 253
Telephone* .................................. 254
Tele Aid ........................................ 257
Garage door opener ..................... 263
Operation ......................................... 269
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ........ 270
Driving instructions ........................... 271
Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 271
Drinking and driving..................... 271
Pedals .......................................... 271
Power assistance ......................... 272
Brakes.......................................... 272
Driving off .................................... 274
Parking......................................... 275
Tires............................................. 275
Hydroplaning................................ 276
Tire traction ................................. 276
Tire speed rating .......................... 277
Winter driving instructions ........... 278
Standing water............................. 279
Passenger compartment.............. 280
Driving abroad ............................. 280
Control and operation of
radio transmitter .......................... 280
Catalytic converter....................... 281
Emission control .......................... 281
Coolant temperature.................... 282
Contents
At the gas station .............................. 283
Refueling...................................... 283
Check regularly and
before a long trip.......................... 285
Engine compartment ......................... 286
Hood ............................................ 286
Engine oil ..................................... 287
Transmission fluid level................ 289
Coolant level ................................ 290
Battery ......................................... 291
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*......... 292
Tires and wheels................................ 293
Important guidelines .................... 293
Tire care and maintenance........... 294
Direction of rotation..................... 295
Loading the vehicle ...................... 296
Recommended tire inflation
pressure....................................... 301
Checking tire inflation pressure ... 302
MOExtended system* .................. 313
Tire labeling.................................. 313
Load identification ....................... 317
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) .............................................. 318
Maximum tire load ........................ 319
Maximum tire inflation pressure ... 320
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards (U.S. vehicles). 320
Tire ply material ............................ 322
Tire and loading terminology......... 323
Rotating tires ................................ 326
Winter driving ..................................... 327
Winter tires ................................... 327
Block heater* (Canada only)......... 328
Snow chains.................................. 328
Maintenance....................................... 329
Maintenance service indicator
message ....................................... 329
Calling up the maintenance
service indicator ........................... 331
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator ........................... 331
Vehicle care........................................ 332
Cleaning and care of vehicle ......... 332
Practical hints .................................. 341
What to do if … ................................... 342
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 342
Lamp in center console ................ 353
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display .................... 356
Where will I find...? ............................. 391
First aid kit.................................... 391
Spare wheel.................................. 391
Vehicle tool kit.............................. 393
Luggage box ................................. 395
Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 396
Unlocking the vehicle ................... 396
Locking the vehicle....................... 397
Fuel filler flap emergency release . 398
Manually unlocking
the gear selector lever.................. 398
Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 400
Power tilt/sliding sunroof............. 400
Resetting activated head restraints.... 401
Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 402
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* ............................... 402
Contents
Replacing bulbs ................................. 404
Bulbs ............................................ 404
Replacing bulbs for front lamps.... 407
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps..... 409
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 410
Wiper blades ................................ 410
Flat tire .............................................. 412
Preparing the vehicle.................... 412
Mounting the spare wheel............ 412
MOExtended system*................... 419
Battery ............................................... 420
Disconnecting the battery ............ 421
Removing the battery ................... 421
Charging and reinstalling
the battery.................................... 422
Reconnecting the battery............. 422
Jump starting ..................................... 423
Towing the vehicle ............................. 425
Installing towing eye bolt.............. 426
Fuses ................................................. 428
Main fuse box in passenger
compartment................................ 429
Fuse box in trunk.......................... 429
Technical data ................................. 431
Parts service ...................................... 432
Warranty coverage............................. 433
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet ..................... 433
Identification labels ........................... 434
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 436
CLS 550 ....................................... 436
CLS 63 AMG ................................ 436
Engine................................................ 437
Rims and tires.................................... 438
Same size tires............................. 439
Mixed size tires ............................ 441
MOExtended tires*....................... 444
Spare wheel ................................. 445
Electrical system ............................... 447
Main dimensions and weights............ 448
Main dimensions .......................... 448
Weights ........................................ 448
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc........... 449
Capacities .................................... 449
Engine oils ................................... 451
Engine oil additives ...................... 451
Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 451
Brake fluid.................................... 451
Premium unleaded gasoline......... 452
Fuel requirements........................ 452
Gasoline additives........................ 453
Coolants ...................................... 453
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*......... 456
Index................................................. 457
9
Product information
왔
Introduction
Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Genuine
Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitabili-
ty for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in indi-
vidual cases an official approval or authori-
zation by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and acces-
sories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories
approved by us are available at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
you will receive comprehensive informa-
tion, also on permissible technical modifi-
cations, and where proper installation will
be performed.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam-
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail-
ure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to demonstrate the proper proce-
dures.
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, infor-
mation, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instruc-
tions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures.The Opera-
tor’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet are
important documents and should be kept
with the vehicle.
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
앫New Car Limited Warranty
앫Emission System Warranty
앫Emission Performance Warranty
앫California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only)
앫State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws)
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au-
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or mal-
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the
period of 18 months from original delivery
of the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or mal-
function results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de-
fect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or mal-
function of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have direct-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different sub-
stantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Written notification should not be sent to a
dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ07645-0350
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
service. The service advisor will record
each service in the booklet for you.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
gram brochure in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser-
vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Car” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-
eign countries, please be aware that:
앫service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
앫unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-
alytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫gasoline may have a considerably low-
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
able for delivery in Europe under our Euro-
pean Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
14
Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-
ing or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.
Controls in detail
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed in your vehi-
cle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
cal innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehi-
cle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Technical data
All important technical data for your vehi-
cle can be found in this section.
Indexes
The table of contents and the index are
designed to help you find information
quickly and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫this Operator’s Manual
앫the Maintenance Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehi-
cle.
15
Introduction
Symbols
왔Symbols
Trademarks:
앫ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered
trademarks of DaimlerChrysler.
앫HomeLink® is a registered trademark
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company.
앫BabySmartTM is a registered trademark
of Siemens Automotive Group.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
* Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehi-
cle.
왘This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄 page This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
a warning which is continued on
the next page.
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
a procedure which is continued
on the next page.
-> This symbol is used to indicate
cross-references to term defini-
tions.
Display
Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.
Warning! G
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
ards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
!Highlights hazards that may result in dam-
age to your vehicle.
iHelpful hints or further information you may
find useful.
16
Introduction
Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫the safety precautions in this manual
앫the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫traffic rules and regulations
앫motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
dards
Warning! G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made
may produce an undesired effect on other
systems. Electronic malfunctions could seri-
ously impair the operating safety of your ve-
hicle.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore nev-
er turn off the engine while driving.
Warning! G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage to and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden strong vibration or ride disturbance,
or you suspect that damage to your vehicle
has occurred, you should turn on your haz-
ard warning flashers, carefully slow down,
and drive with caution to an area which is a
safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the
vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or other qualified maintenance or repair fa-
cility for further inspection or repairs.
Warning! G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself.
Removal of any of these labels may cause
you and others to be unaware of certain
risks which may result in an accident and/or
personal injury.
17
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
18
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
19
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
20
21
At a glance
Exterior view
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Storage compartments
Door control panel
22
At a glance
Exterior view
23
At a glance
Exterior view
Item Page
1Trunk
앫Unlocking 102
앫Opening and closing 112
앫Spare wheel 391
앫Vehicle tool kit 393
2Rear lamps 404
3Rear window, defrosting 193
4Fuel filler flap 283
앫Fuel requirements 452
5Doors
앫Locking and unlocking 102
앫Opening and closing 111
Item Page
6Towing eye bolt 393
앫Installing towing eye bolt 425
7Rims and tires
앫Checking tire inflation
pressure
302
앫Flat tire 412
8Front lamps 404
9Hood, opening 286
앫Engine oil 287
앫Coolant 290
aWindshield wipers 56
앫Wiper blades, replacing 410
앫Wiper blades, cleaning 337
Item Page
bWindow, cleaning 337
cPower tilt/sliding sunroof 212
dExterior rear view mirrors
앫Adjusting 47
앫Auto-dimming 185
앫Parking position 187
eSide marker lamps 404
24
At a glance
Cockpit
25
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Page
1Combination switch
앫Turn signals 55
앫Windshield wipers 56
앫High beam 55
2Steering wheel gearshift
control*
179
3Cruise control lever
앫Cruise control 215
앫Distronic* 218
4Multifunction steering
wheel
28,
142
5Instrument cluster 26,
138
6Horn
Item Page
7Lever for Voice Control Sys-
tem*, see separate
operating instructions
8Front Parktronic* warning
indicator
235
9Overhead control panel 31
aGlove box lid release, glove
box lock
244
bGlove box 244
cCenter console 29
dStarter switch 38
eSteering wheel adjustment
stalk
44
Heated steering wheel
(Canada only)
252
Item Page
fHeadlamp cleaning button* 185
gParking brake pedal 53, 59
hHood lock release 286
jParking brake release 53
kExterior lamp switch 55,128
lDoor control panel 34
26
At a glance
Instrument cluster
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Page
1LLeft turn signal
indicator lamp
2vESP® warning lamp 343
3Speedometer
4Multifunction display 141
5lDistance warning
lamp
Vehicles without Distronic*:
Warning lamp without func-
tion. It illuminates with the
ignition on. It should go out
when the engine is running.
348
6KRight turn signal
indicator lamp
7Coolant temperature indi-
cator with:
•Coolant temperature
warning lamp
347
Item Page
8Tachometer with:
1Supplemental
Restraint System
(SRS) indicator lamp
350
-Antilock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) indicator
lamp
342
<Seat belt telltale 348
AHigh beam headlamp
indicator lamp
132
9Main odometer with:
앫Selector lever position 51
앫Program mode 177
aClock with: 159
;Brake warning lamp,
USA only
344
3Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
344
Item Page
úEngine malfunction
indicator lamp, USA
only
345
±Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, Cana-
da only
345
HCombination low tire
pressure/TPMS mal-
function telltale,
USA only
351
Low tire pressure
telltale, Canada only
351
bFuel display with:
AFuel tank reserve
warning lamp
348
cReset button for:
앫Resetting trip odometer 139
앫Adjusting instrument
cluster illumination
138
앫Confirming new time
settings
159
28
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item Page
1Multifunction display in
speedometer
141
Operating control system 142
2Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume:
Press button
æup/to increase
çdown/to decrease
3Telephone*:
Press button
sto take a call
to dial
to redial
tto end a call
to reject an incoming
call
Item Page
4Menu systems:
Press button
èfor next menu
ÿfor previous menu
5Moving within a menu:
Press button
jfor next display
kfor previous display
29
At a glance
Center console
왔Center console
Upper part Item Page
14-zone automatic climate
control
190
2COMAND system, see sepa-
rate operating instructions
3Seat heating*, front passen-
ger side
123
Seat ventilation*, front pas-
senger side
124
4Electronic Stability Program
(ESP®) control switch
95
5Central locking switch 119
Item Page
6Opening/closing button for
CD changer, see separate
COMAND operating instruc-
tions
7Rear seat head restraints
switch, folding down
121
8Rear window sunshade*
switch
188
9Seat heating*, driver’s side 123
Seat ventilation*, driver’s
side
124
aHazard warning flasher
switch
134
bFront passenger front
air bag off indicator lamp
76
30
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Item Page
1Ashtray 249
2KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button
39
3Selector lever for automatic
transmission
51,
173
4Parking assist (Parktronic
system)* deactivation
switch
235
5Adaptive damping system
(ADS) switch
231
Item Page
6Vehicle level control button 232
7Thumbwheel for setting dis-
tance in Distronic*
227
8Distance warning function*
on/off switch
227
9Program mode selector
switch for automatic trans-
mission
177
31
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔Overhead control panel
Item Page
1Rear interior lighting on/off 135
2Automatic interior lighting 135
3Front interior lighting on/off 135
4Right front reading lamp
on/off
135
5Tilt/sliding sunroof 212
6Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
257
7Rear view mirror 185
8Front reading lamps 135
Item Page
9Garage door opener 263
aHands-free microphones for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone*, and
Voice Control System* (see
separate operating instruc-
tions)
bAmbient lighting 163
cInterior lighting 135
dLeft front reading lamp
on/off
135
32
At a glance
Storage compartments
33
At a glance
Storage compartments
Item Page
1Glove box 244
2Front passenger seat storage
compartment with first aid kit
391
3Door pocket
4Ashtray 250
5Ruffled storage bag 246
6Door pocket
7Side storage pocket in trunk
8Luggage box under the trunk
floor
395
9Door pocket
aRuffled storage bag 246
bAshtray 250
cDoor pocket
dDriver’s seat storage compart-
ment
245
Item Page
eSun visor card clip 187
fCD changer, see separate
COMAND operating instruc-
tions
gParcel net in front passenger
footwell
246
hAshtray with cigarette lighter 249
jCup holders 247
kStorage compartment/tele-
phone* compartment under
the center armrest
244
lCup holder in the rear center
console
248
mRear storage compartment in
the rear center console
245
nCup holder in the rear armrest 249
oStorage compartment in the
rear armrest
245
34
At a glance
Door control panel
Item Page
1Inside door handle 111
2Seat adjustment 42
3Memory function (for stor-
ing seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel settings)
125
4Exterior rear view mirror ad-
justment
47
5Switches for opening/clos-
ing front and rear side win-
dows, rear window override
switch
207
6Remote trunk release
switch, trunk opening/clos-
ing system*
113
35
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
36
Getting started
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func-
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the infor-
mation given here.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page refer-
ences are located at the end of each seg-
ment.
Unlocking
Unlocking with the SmartKey
SmartKey with remote control
1‹Lock button
2ŠOpening button for trunk
3ŒUnlock button
4ÂPanic button
왘Press unlock button Œ on the
SmartKey.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
왘Get in the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s un-
supervised access to a vehicle could result
in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
37
Getting started
Unlocking
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄page 102).
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock and unlock the vehicle without using
the remote control buttons on the
SmartKey and start the engine without in-
serting the SmartKey in the starter switch.
왘Pull an outside door handle.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
왘Get in the vehicle.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄page 105).
iOpening a door causes the window on that
door to open slightly. They will return to the up
position when the door is closed.
!The side windows will not open or close if
the battery is discharged or the windows are cov-
ered with ice. As a result, you may no longer be
able to properly close the door. Do not attempt
to force the door shut. Doing so may damage the
door or the side window. Correct the condition
that prevents the windows from operating before
attempting to close the door.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
iTo unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no fur-
ther than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away
from the door.
iOpening a door causes the window on that
door to open slightly. They will return to the up
position when the door is closed.
!The side windows will not open or close if
the battery is discharged or the windows are cov-
ered with ice. As a result, you may no longer be
able to properly close the door. Do not attempt
to force the door shut. Doing so may damage the
door or the side window. Correct the condition
that prevents the windows from operating before
attempting to close the door.
38
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions SmartKey
Starter switch
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
0For removing the SmartKey
1Power supply for some electrical con-
sumers, such as seat adjustment
2Ignition (power supply for all electri-
cal consumers) and driving position.
All lamps (except high beam head-
lamp indicator lamp and turn signal
indicator lamps unless activated) in
the instrument cluster come on. If a
lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
come on when the ignition is
switched on, have it checked and re-
placed if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, see “Lamps in instrument
cluster” (컄page 342).
3Starting position
iWhen you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except high beam
headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica-
tor lamps unless activated) in the instrument
cluster come on. The indicator and warning
lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated)
should go out when the engine is running. This in-
dicates that the respective systems are opera-
tional.
39
Getting started
Unlocking
For information on starting the engine with
the SmartKey, see “SmartKey”
(컄page 102).
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is inside
the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button on the gear selector le-
ver corresponds to turning the SmartKey
to the various starter switch positions.
If you firmly depress the brake pedal dur-
ing pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button, the engine starts automatically.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1USA only
2Canada only
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
왘Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘Do not depress the brake pedal.
iThe SmartKey can only be removed from the
starter switch with the gear selector lever in
position P.
iIf the SmartKey is left in starter switch posi-
tion 0 for an extended period of time, it can no
longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the
steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey
from the starter switch and reinsert.
!If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the battery may not be sufficient-
ly charged.
앫Check the battery and charge it if necessary
(컄page 420).
앫Get a jump start (컄page 423).
To prevent accelerated vehicle battery discharge
or a completely discharged vehicle battery, al-
ways remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch when the engine is not in operation.
iThe function of the SmartKey overrules the
KEYLESS-GO function.
40
Getting started
Unlocking
Position 0
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button, the vehicle’s on-board elec-
tronics have status 0 (as with SmartKey re-
moved).
Position 1
왘Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
Ignition (or position 2)
왘Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
twice.
This supplies power for all electrical
consumers. All lamps (except high
beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps unless acti-
vated) in the instrument cluster come
on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster
fails to come on when the ignition is
switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, see “Lamps in instrument clus-
ter” (컄page 342).
For information on starting the engine us-
ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄page 39).
iIf you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
앫once again, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on
앫twice, the power supply is again switched off iIf you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is
again switched off.
iWhen you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except high beam
headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica-
tor lamps unless activated) in the instrument
cluster come on. The indicator and warning
lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated)
should go out when the engine is running. This in-
dicates that the respective systems are opera-
tional.
41
Getting started
Adjusting
왔Adjusting
Seats
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas-
tening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Warning! G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts
provide the best restraint when the wearer
is in a nearly upright position and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
Warning! G
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄page 48).
Observe the following points:
앫Adjust the backrest until your arms are
slightly angled when holding the steer-
ing wheel.
앫Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The po-
sition should be as far to the rear as pos-
sible, consistent with ability to properly
operate controls.
앫Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports
the back of the head at eye level.
앫Never place hands under the seat or
near any moving parts while a seat is be-
ing adjusted.
Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the power seats can be operated when the
respective door is open. Therefore, do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could re-
sult in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
42
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment
The seat adjustment switches are located
on the front doors.
1Seat fore and aft adjustment
2Backrest tilt
3Head restraint height
4Seat height
5Seat cushion tilt
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
or
왘Open the respective door.
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 1.
Warning! G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child. For additional informa-
tion, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄page 84).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
iThe memory function (컄page 125) lets you
store the settings for the seat position together
with the settings for the steering wheel and the
exterior rear view mirrors.
!When moving the seat, make sure there are
no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Oth-
erwise you could damage the seats.
iDepending on the set height of the head re-
straint, the seat fore and aft position is automat-
ically pre-set.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
Backrest tilt
왘Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 2.
Head restraint height
왘Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 3.
Seat height
왘Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 4.
Seat cushion tilt
왘Press the switch up or down in the
direction of arrow 5 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.
Head restraint adjusting
Manually adjust the head restraint.
왘Push or pull on the upper edge of the
head restraint cushion.
Comfort head restraint* adjusting
1Head restraint side adjustment
2Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the po-
tential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
iAdjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.
Warning! G
When folding back the side cushions, never
reach between the side cushion and the
mounting post. You could otherwise be
trapped.
44
Getting started
Adjusting
You can individually adjust side
cushions 1 of the comfort head re-
straints.
Adjusting side cushions
왘Pull or push sides 1 into desired posi-
tion.
Adjusting forward or backward
왘Pull or push head restraint in direction
of arrow 2.
For more information on seats, see “Seats”
(컄page 120).
Steering wheel Steering wheel adjustment
The stalk for steering wheel adjustment is
located on the steering column (lower left).
1Adjusting steering column, in or out
2Adjusting steering column, up or down
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
or
왘Open the driver’s door.
Adjusting steering column in or out
왘Move stalk in direction of arrows 1
until a comfortable steering wheel posi-
tion is reached with your arms slightly
bent at the elbow.
iAdjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.
Warning! G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv-
ing could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock your vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the steering wheel adjustment feature can
be operated when the driver’s door is open.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
45
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting steering column up or down
왘Move stalk in direction of arrows 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely
and that all the displays (incl. malfunc-
tion and indicator lamps) on the instru-
ment cluster are clearly visible.
Easy-entry/exit feature
This feature allows for easier entry into and
exit from the vehicle. When entering and
exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in
its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activat-
ed or deactivated in the
Convenience
sub-
menu of the control system (컄page 166).
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you
앫close the driver’s door with the ignition
switched on
or
앫insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (컄page 39) once
with the driver’s door closed
iThe memory function (컄page 125) lets you
store the setting for the seat position together
with the setting for the steering wheel and the
exterior rear view mirrors.
Warning! G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
the following:
앫Move steering wheel adjustment stalk
(컄page 44).
앫Press one of the memory position but-
tons or the memory button M
(컄page 126).
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
iThe last set steering wheel position is stored
when
앫the ignition is switched off
앫the position is stored in memory
(컄page 125)
46
Getting started
Adjusting
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
앫remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
or
앫open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄page 39) in position 1
Mirrors
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic condi-
tions.
iIf the current position for the steering wheel
is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering
wheel will no longer be able to move upward
when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted
when the engine is started.
Warning! G
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in mo-
tion. All steering wheel adjustment must be
completed before setting the vehicle in mo-
tion. Driving off with the steering wheel still
adjusting could cause the driver to lose con-
trol of the vehicle.
Warning! G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
!Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can only be completely
removed while in their liquid state and by apply-
ing plenty of water.
47
Getting started
Adjusting
Interior rear view mirror
왘Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
For more information, see “Rear view mir-
rors” (컄page 185).
Exterior rear view mirrors
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
1Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-
ror button
2Adjustment button
3Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Press button 3 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button 1
for the passenger-side exterior rear
view mirror.
왘Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left or right according to the desired
setting.
For more information, see “Activating exte-
rior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄page 187).
For more information, see “Rear view mir-
rors” (컄page 185).
Warning! G
Exercise care when using the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
!If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition
it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into
place. The mirror housing is now properly posi-
tioned and you can adjust the mirror normally.
iThe memory function (컄page 125) lets you
store the setting for the seat position together
with the setting for the steering wheel and the
exterior rear view mirrors.
At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear
view mirrors will be heated automatically.
48
Getting started
Driving
Fastening the seat belts
Warning! G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
structing the pedals range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
Warning! G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄page 78).
Warning! G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating position. Thus, we strongly recom-
mend that children be placed in the rear
seats. Regardless of seating position, chil-
dren 12 years old and under must be seated
and properly secured in an appropriate in-
fant or toddler restraint, or booster seat rec-
ommended for the size and weight of the
child. For additional information, see “Chil-
dren in the vehicle” (컄page 84).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning! G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
49
Getting started
Driving
1Belt outlet
2Latch plate
3Release button
4Buckle
왘With a smooth motion, pull the belt
from belt outlet 1.
왘Place the shoulder portion of the belt
across the top of your shoulder and the
lap portion across your hips.
왘Push latch plate 2 into buckle 4 until
it clicks.
왘If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning! G
Read and observe the additional warning
notices printed in the “Safety and security”
section (컄page 78).
50
Getting started
Driving
Belt outlet height adjustment
1Release button
왘Press release button 1 and move the
seat belt height adjuster upward or
downward.
Proper use of seat belts
앫Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the belt under your
arm.
앫Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫Place the seat backrest in a nearly
upright position.
앫Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
앫Do not fasten a seat belt around a per-
son and another object at the same
time. When using a seat belt to secure
infant or toddler restraints or children
in booster seats, always follow the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
앫Check your seat belt periodically dur-
ing travel to make sure that it is proper-
ly positioned.
앫Make sure that the seat belt is always
fitted snugly. Take special care of this
when wearing loose clothing.
Warning! G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effective-
ness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
51
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Automatic transmission
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
PPark position with gear selector lever
lock
RReverse gear
NNeutral
DDrive position
For more information, see the “Controls in
detail” section (컄page 176).
Starting with the SmartKey
For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off en-
gine” (컄page 60).
왘Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘Do not depress the accelerator.
왘Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄page 38).
Warning! G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-
consciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
dow fully open.
iYou can also use the “touch-start” function.
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it
again immediately. The engine then starts auto-
matically.
52
Getting started
Driving
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the
gear selector lever.
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Locking with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄page 62).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1USA only
2Canada only
왘Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
왘Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure. Do not depress
accelerator.
The selector lever lock is released.
왘Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button 1 once.
The engine starts if the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.
왘If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that
may be open to allow for better detec-
tion of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
Or:
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
왘Repeat the starting procedure
(컄page 51). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘Get a jump start (컄page 423).
Warning! G
As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started.
Therefore, never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, as they could otherwise acci-
dentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle.
53
Getting started
Driving
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a mal-
function in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Parking brake
1Release handle
2Parking brake pedal
왘Release the parking brake pedal by
pulling on handle 1.
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or
3(Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Driving off
왘Depress the brake pedal.
왘Move selector lever to position D or R.
왘Release the brake pedal.
왘Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automat-
ic central locking system engages and the
locking knobs drop down.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
could release the parking brake, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
iWait for the gear selection process to com-
plete before setting the vehicle in motion.
!If you hear a warning signal and the
message
Release parking brake
appears in
the multifunction display when driving off, you
have forgotten to release the parking brake.
Release the parking brake (컄page 53). 컄컄
54
Getting started
Driving
After a cold start, the automatic transmis-
sion engages at a higher revolution. This
allows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier.
For more information on driving, see “Driv-
ing instructions” (컄page 271).
iOnce the vehicle is in motion, the automatic
central locking system engages and the locking
knobs drop down.
The automatic door lock feature can be deacti-
vated (컄page 165).
You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to do
so.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of loss of control.
Warning! G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
!Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
!Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine
speeds may shorten the service life of the en-
gine.
CLS 63 AMG:
At engine temperatures below 68°F (20°C), the
engine’s maximum speed is restricted in order to
protect it from damage. Avoid driving your vehi-
cle at full speed when the engine is cold to pre-
vent premature engine wear and/or diminished
comfort.
컄컄
55
Getting started
Driving
Switching on headlamps
Low beam headlamps
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
Exterior lamp switch
1Off
2Low beam headlamps on
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The low beam headlamps and the
green indicator lamp C in the exte-
rior lamp switch comes on.
High beam
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Combination switch
1High beam
2High beam flasher
왘Push the combination switch in direc-
tion of arrow 1.
The high beam headlamps and the high
beam headlamp indicator lamp A in
the instrument cluster comes on
(컄page 26).
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄page 128).
Turn signals
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Combination switch
1Turn signals, right
2Turn signals, left
왘Press combination switch in direction
of arrow 1 or 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K in the instrument
cluster flashes (컄page 26). 컄컄
56
Getting started
Driving
The combination switch resets automati-
cally after major steering wheel move-
ments.
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Combination switch
1Single wipe
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
2Switching on windshield wipers
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
iTo signal minor directional changes such as
changing lanes, press combination switch only
to point of resistance and release. The corre-
sponding turn signals will flash three times.
!Do not operate the wipers when the wind-
shield is dry. Dust that accumulates on a wind-
shield might scratch the glass and/or damage
the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry
windshield. If it is necessary to operate the wip-
ers in dry weather conditions, always operate
the wipers with windshield washer fluid
(컄page 58).
!If anything blocks the windshield wipers
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediate-
ly.
앫For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
location
앫turn off the engine by turning the
SmartKey to position 0 and withdraw
SmartKey from starter switch
or
앫turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
door open, starter switch is in
position 0, same as with SmartKey re-
moved from starter switch)
before attempting to remove any blockage.
앫Remove blockage.
앫Turn the windshield wipers on again.
컄컄
57
Getting started
Driving
Switching on windshield wipers
왘Turn the combination switch to the de-
sired position depending on the inten-
sity of the rain.
MWindshield wipers off
USlow intermittent wiping
Rain sensor operation with low
sensitivity.
VFast intermittent wiping
Rain sensor operation with high
sensitivity.
uSlow continuous wiping
tFast continuous wiping
Intermittent wiping
Only switch on intermittent wiping under
wet weather conditions or in the presence
of precipitation.
Intermittent wiping interval is dependent
on wetness of windshield.
왘Turn the combination switch to
position U or V.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor.
!If windshield wipers fail to function at all in
combination switch position U or V,
앫set the combination switch to the next high-
est wiper speed
앫have the windshield wipers checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center !Do not leave windshield wipers in
intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to
an automatic car wash or during windshield
cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in the
presence of water sprayed on the windshield,
and windshield wipers may be damaged as a re-
sult.
!If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects
may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an
undesired fashion. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows.
You should therefore switch off the windshield
wipers when weather conditions are dry.
iIntermittent wiping is interrupted when the
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
opened. This protects persons getting into or out
of the vehicle from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when
앫all doors are closed
and
앫the gear selector lever is in position D or R
or
앫the wiper setting is changed using the com-
bination switch
58
Getting started
Driving
Single wipe
왘Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 1 (컄page 56) to
the resistance point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘Push the combination switch in direc-
tion of arrow 1 (컄page 56) past the
resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄page 292).
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
앫An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫The engine electronics may not be
operating properly.
앫Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘Give very little gas.
왘Have the problem repaired by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
The coolant temperature is above
248°F (120°C)
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
왘Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
soon as possible and turn off the en-
gine. Allow engine and coolant to cool
off.
왘Check the coolant level and add cool-
ant if necessary (컄page 290).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
왘Do not start the engine under any
circumstances.
왘Notify local fire and/or police authori-
ties.
If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:
왘Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫major assemblies
앫fuel system
앫engine mount:
왘Start the engine in the usual manner.
iTo prevent smears on the windshield or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with wind-
shield washer fluid every now and then even
when it is raining.
59
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Parking brake
Warning! G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve-
hicle.
Warning! G
If you have selected the Comfort suspension
tuning (컄page 231), the vehicle lowers
slightly when it is locked. You should there-
fore make sure that no one is standing near
the wheel arches or lying underneath the ve-
hicle when it is being locked. Otherwise,
personal injury could result.
Warning! G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result
of vehicle movement, before turning off the
engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫Slowly release brake pedal.
앫When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
앫Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, or press
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
앫Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
when leaving.
!If you have selected the Comfort suspen-
sion tuning (컄page 231), the vehicle lowers
slightly when you lock it within approximately
60 seconds after switching off the engine. When
parking, make sure that your vehicle cannot
come into contact with other objects, such as a
curb, while lowering. Your vehicle could
otherwise be damaged.
Warning! G
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to
lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident. In addition, the vehi-
cle’s brake lights do not light up when the
parking brake is engaged.
60
Getting started
Parking and locking
1Release handle
2Parking brake pedal
왘Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2.
When the engine is running, the warn-
ing lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
Switching off headlamps
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄page 55).
For more information, see “Lighting”
(컄page 128).
Turning off engine
왘Shift the automatic transmission to
position P (컄page 173).
왘Apply the parking brake (컄page 59).
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake and/or move the gear selec-
tor lever from position P, either of which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Warning! G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in position P
is dangerous. Also, when parked on an in-
cline, position P alone may not prevent your
vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people
or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
iAlways set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄page 173).
On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the
road curb.
61
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off with the SmartKey
왘Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
(컄page 38) to position 0.
왘Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*
왘Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (컄page 39) to turn off the en-
gine.
With the driver’s door closed, the start-
er switch is now in position 1. With the
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
is set to position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch
(컄page 38).
Releasing seat belts
왘Press the seat belt release button
(컄page 49).
Allow the retractor to completely
rewind the seat belt by guiding the
latch plate.
Locking
iIf you hear a warning signal you have tried to
turn off the engine while the gear selector lever
was not in P.
In addition, the message
Gear selector le-
ver in Park position
appears in the multi-
function display.
Place the gear selector lever in position P.
!Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that
the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get
caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and
impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or
cause damage to the door and/or door trim pan-
el. Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, make sure that there
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
62
Getting started
Parking and locking
왘Exit the vehicle and close all doors and
the trunk.
Locking with the SmartKey
왘After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button ‹ on the SmartKey
(컄page 36).
With the trunk and all doors closed:
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄page 108).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄page 102).
Locking with KEYLESS-GO*
1Lock button
왘After exiting the vehicle, press lock
button 1 at the outside door handle or
on the trunk lid.
With the trunk and all doors closed:
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
For more information, see “Factory
setting” (컄page 108).
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄page 102).
iIf you hear a warning signal you have forgot-
ten to switch off the headlamps before opening
the driver’s door.
In addition the message
Switch off lights
appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the headlamps.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
64
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im-
portant facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
앫Seat belts (컄page 78)
앫Child restraints (컄page 84)
앫Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) (컄page 88)
Additional protection is provided by
앫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
with
앫Air bags (컄page 66)
앫Air bag control unit (with crash
sensors)
앫Emergency Tensioning Device
(ETD) for seat belts (컄page 81)
앫Active head restraints (컄page 83)
앫Preventive occupant safety
(PRE-SAFE®) (컄page 82)
Air bag system components with
앫Front passenger front air bag off indica-
tor lamp (컄page 76)
앫USA only:
Front passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄page 71)
앫Canada only:
Front passenger seat with
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation sys-
tem (컄page 76)
Although independent systems, their pro-
tective functions work in conjunction with
each other.
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
The 1indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on and goes out no later than a
few seconds after the engine has been
started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness if the 1indicator lamp is not
lit when the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1indicator lamp:
앫fails to go out after approximately
4 seconds after the engine was started
앫does not come on at all
앫comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
iFor information on infants and children trav-
eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys-
tems for infants and children, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄page 84).
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
Modifications to or work improperly con-
ducted on restraint systems (such as seat
belts and anchors, Emergency Tensioning
Devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags)
or their wiring, as well as tampering with in-
terconnected electronic systems, can lead
to the restraint systems no longer function-
ing as intended.
Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices,
for example, could deploy inadvertently or
fail to deploy in accidents although the de-
celeration threshold for air bag deployment
is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the re-
straint systems. Do not tamper with elec-
tronic components or their software.
Warning! G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
In addition, improper repair work on the SRS
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera-
tive or causing unintended air bag deploy-
ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
be performed by qualified technicians. Con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
Warning! G
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-
tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal im-
pacts (front air bags, driver-side knee bag),
side impacts (side impact air bags and win-
dow curtain air bags) or rollovers (window
curtain air bags). However, no system avail-
able today can totally eliminate injuries and
fatalities.
The activation of the air bags temporarily re-
leases a small amount of dust from the
air bags. This dust, however, is neither inju-
rious to your health, nor does it indicate a
fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
some temporary breathing difficulty for peo-
ple with asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,
then get fresh air by opening a window or
door.
Warning! G
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear their
respective seat belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and make sure that it is prop-
erly positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the air bag.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
or too close to the air bag can be seriously
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates
with great force in the blink of an eye:
앫Sit properly belted in an upright position
with your back against the seat back-
rest.
앫Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper opera-
tion of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breast-
bone to the center of the air bag cover
on the steering wheel must be at least
10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be
able to accomplish this by a combina-
tion of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any prob-
lems, please contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dash-
board.
앫Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
side the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front air bag inflates.
앫Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side impact air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the air bag be triggered. Always sit near-
ly upright, properly use the seat belts
and use an appropriately sized infant re-
straint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of
the child.
앫Canada only: Children 12 years old and
under must never ride in the front seat,
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deacti-
vate the front passenger front air bag
when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the air bag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, seri-
ous or fatal injury will result.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other
occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
Warning! G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat.
It should be noted that with respect to both
front and rear side impact air bags there is a
possibility for a side impact air bag related
injury if occupants, especially children, are
not properly seated or restrained when next
to a side impact air bag which needs to
deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do
its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Occupants, especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
side impact air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the side impact air bag be deployed.
(2) Always sit as upright as possible, prop-
erly use the seat belts, and for children
12 years old and under, use an appropri-
ately sized infant restraint, toddler re-
straint, or booster seat recommended
for the size and weight of the child.
(3) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have the rear mount-
ed side impact air bags deactivated, then
deactivation can be accomplished upon
your written request to do so at your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional
cost. Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
Emergency Tensioning Device and
air bag
iAir bags are designed to activate only in cer-
tain frontal impacts (front air bags, driver-side
knee bag), side impacts (side impact and window
curtain air bags) which exceed preset thresholds
and in certain rollovers (window curtain
air bags). Only during these events will they pro-
vide their supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always wear
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for
the air bags to provide their supplemental pro-
tection.
In case of other types of impacts and impacts be-
low air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will
not be deployed. The driver and passenger will
then be protected to the extent possible by a
properly fastened seat belt. A properly fastened
seat belt is also needed to provide the best pro-
tection in a rollover.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
It is important to your safety and that of your pas-
sengers that you replace deployed air bags and
repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure
that the vehicle will continue to provide supple-
mental crash protection for occupants.
Warning! G
앫Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts in-
stalled or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫Air bags and Emergency Tensioning De-
vices (ETDs) are designed to function on
a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
that was activated must be replaced.
앫No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or re-
moving any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges etc. over the steering
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag
cover, outboard sides of the front seat
backrests, door trim panels,
or door frame trims, and installation of
additional electrical/electronic equip-
ment on or near SRS components and
wiring. Keep area between air bags and
occupants free from objects (e.g. pack-
ages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
앫Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
앫Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash
they may not be able to provide ade-
quate protection.
앫Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projec-
tiles and cause head and other injuries
when the window curtain air bag is de-
ployed.
앫Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Front air bags
1Driver’s air bag
2Passenger air bag
3Knee bag
Driver and passenger air bags are de-
ployed:
앫in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫independently of the side impact
air bags
앫Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not
touch.
앫In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended
air bag deployment. Work on the SRS
must therefore only be performed by
qualified technicians. Contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag
unit or Emergency Tensioning Device,
our safety instructions must be fol-
lowed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫Given the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and
the textile structure of the air bags,
there is the possibility of abrasions or
other, potentially more serious injuries
resulting from air bag deployment.
Warning! G
Only use seat covers which have been test-
ed and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the side impact air bags. Contact your au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availabil-
ity.
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The air bags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
ed by the fastened seat belts.
The front passenger air bag will only be
deployed if:
앫the front passenger seat is occupied
앫the 75 indicator lamp in
the center console is not lit
(컄page 76)
앫the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
ment threshold
Knee bag
The knee bag is located on the driver-side
lower instrument panel. It is designed to
operate together with the driver air bag in
certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset
threshold. The knee bag operates best in
conjunction with a properly positioned and
fastened seat belt.
Side impact air bags, window curtain
air bags
1Front side impact air bags
2Window curtain air bag
3Rear side impact air bags
iThe front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the
air bag to have different rates of inflation that are
based on the rate of vehicle deceleration as as-
sessed by the air bag control unit.
USA only:
On the front passenger side, the front air bag de-
ployment is additionally influenced by the pas-
senger’s weight category as identified by the
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
(컄page 71).
USA only:
The lighter the front passenger side occupant,
the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
for the second stage inflation of the air bag.
!Canada only:
Do not place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
the front passenger seat. This could cause the
front or side impact air bag on the front passen-
ger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the
system’s deployment threshold.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The side impact air bags and window cur-
tain air bags are deployed:
앫on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
ment threshold
앫independently of the front air bags
In addition, the window curtain air bags 2
are deployed:
앫in certain vehicle rollovers
The side impact air bags and window cur-
tain air bags are not deployed in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
ment threshold.
Occupant Classification System
(USA only)
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the front passenger
front air bag on or off based on the classi-
fied occupant weight category determined
by weight sensor readings from the front
passenger seat.
Occupants must sit properly belted in a po-
sition that is as upright as possible with
their back against the seat backrest and
feet on the floor to be correctly classified.
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by lean-
ing on armrests), the OCS may not be able
to properly approximate the occupant’s
weight category.
Furthermore, the occupant weight may ap-
pear to increase or decrease due to
objects hanging on the seat, other passen-
gers pushing on the seat, objects lodged
underneath the seat or stuffed between
seat and middle console or between seat
and door or due to objects applying pres-
sure on the back of the seat. Always make
sure that the seat has clearance in all di-
rections at all times.
Both driver and the front passenger should
always use the 75 indicator
lamp as an indication of whether or not the
front passenger is properly positioned.
iThe system does not deactivate the front
passenger side impact air bag, the window cur-
tain air bag and the Emergency Tensioning De-
vice.
iIf your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take
the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
If the 75 indicator lamp illumi-
nates when an adult or someone larger than
a small individual is in the front passenger
seat, have the front passenger re-position
himself or herself in the seat until the
75 indicator lamp goes out, or
check whether objects are caught under or
around the seat.
More information about air bag display mes-
sages (컄page 362).
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front
air bag deployment when the OCS classified
the front passenger seat occupant as being
up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child re-
straint or if the front passenger seat is
sensed as being empty.
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
ger seat occupant is classified as being up
to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child re-
straint, the 75 indicator lamp
will illuminate when the engine is started
and remain illuminated, indicating that the
front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
ger seat is classified as being empty, the
75 indicator lamp will illumi-
nate when the engine is started and remain
illuminated, indicating that the front passen-
ger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
ger seat occupant is classified as being
heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint or as being a small individual
(such as a young teenager or a small adult),
the 75 indicator lamp will illu-
minate for approximately 6 seconds when
the engine is started and then, depending on
occupant weight sensor readings from the
seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the
75 indicator lamp illuminated,
the front passenger front air bag is deacti-
vated. With the 75 indicator
lamp out, the front passenger front air bag is
activated.
When the OCS senses that the front passen-
ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
someone larger than a small individual, the
75 indicator lamp will illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds when the
engine is started and then go out, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is acti-
vated.
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
If the 75 indicator lamp is illu-
minated, the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated and will not be deployed.
If the 75 indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the front passenger front air
bag is activated and will be deployed:
앫in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫independently of the side impact
air bags
If the front passenger front air bag is
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
influenced by:
앫the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unit
앫front passenger’s weight category as
identified by the Occupant Classification
System (OCS)
Warning! G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
mended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
and top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
Always sit nearly upright, properly use the
seat belts and for children 12 years old and
under, use an appropriately sized infant re-
straint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following im-
portant information when circumstances re-
quire you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropri-
ate child restraint on the front passen-
ger seat.
앫A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be serious-
ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
senger front air bag inflates in a collision
which could occur under some circum-
stances, even with the air bag technolo-
gy installed in your vehicle. The only
means to completely eliminate this risk
is to never place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the back seat. 컄컄
74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫If you must install a rear-facing child re-
straint on the front passenger seat be-
cause circumstances require you to do
so, make sure that the
75 indicator lamp is illumi-
nated, indicating that the front passen-
ger front air bag is deactivated. Should
the indicator lamp not illuminate or go
out while the restraint is installed,
please check installation. Periodically
check the indicator lamp while driving to
make sure the lamp is illuminated. If the
75 indicator lamp goes out
or remains out, do not transport a child
on the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the front passenger front
air bag inflates.
앫If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and se-
cure child restraint with the vehicle’s
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be activat-
ed (컄page 72).
iDeployment of the driver front air bag does
not mean that the front passenger front air bag
also should have deployed.
The Occupant Classification System (컄page 71)
may have determined:
앫that the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint - both instances where the
system suppresses deployment of the front
passenger front air bag even though the im-
pact met the criteria and was of sufficient
severity to deploy the driver front air bag
앫that the seat was occupied by a small individ-
ual (such as a young teenager or a small
adult) or a child weighing more than the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint - instances where
the system may suppress deployment of the
front passenger front air bag even though
the impact met the criteria and was of suffi-
cient severity to deploy the driver front
air bag
컄컄
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The 75 indicator lamp is lo-
cated in the center console.
1Indicator lamp
The 75 indicator lamp 1 will
be illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed or in starter switch position 0
(컄page 38).
Warning! G
If the 1indicator lamp and the
75 indicator lamp are lit at the
same time, there is a malfunction in the
Occupant Classification System. The front
passenger front air bag will be deactivated
in this case.
In order to ensure proper operation of the
air bag system and OCS:
앫Have the system checked as soon as
possible by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫Do not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into
the ruffled storage bag on the back of
the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the
OCS may not be able to properly approx-
imate the occupant weight category.
앫Do not place objects under and/or
around the front passenger seat.
앫Do not hang anything from or attach any
items to the seats.
앫Do not stuff objects such as books be-
tween the middle console and the front
passenger seat.
앫Do not move the front passenger seat
backwards against stiff objects.
앫Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
앫Do not lean on the armrests or lift your-
self from the seat by using the handle
over the door as this may cause the OCS
to be unable to correctly approximate
the occupant weight category.
앫Only have the seat repaired or replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
앫Read and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
76
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Self-test Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (USA only)
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice, the 75 indicator lamp
located in the center console illuminates. If
an adult occupant is properly sitting on the
front passenger seat and the system sens-
es the occupant as being an adult, the
75 indicator lamp will illumi-
nate and go out after approximately
6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
senses the front passenger seat as being
empty, the 75 indicator lamp
will illuminate and not go out.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄page 353).
BabySmartTM air bag deactivation
system (Canada only)
175 indicator lamp
Special BabySmartTM compatible child
seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, are
required for use with the BabySmartTM
air bag deactivation system. With the
special child seat properly installed, the
front passenger front air bag will not
deploy.
Warning! G
If the 75 indicator lamp should
not illuminate, the system is not functioning.
You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center before seating any child on the front
passenger seat.
Warning! G
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi-
cation System. The bottom of the child seat
must make full contact with the passenger
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child
seat could cause injuries to the child in case
of an accident, instead of increasing protec-
tion for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The 75 indicator lamp locat-
ed in the center console will be illuminat-
ed, except with the SmartKey removed or
in starter switch position 0.
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed (Canada only)
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice, the 75 indicator lamp
located in the center console comes on for
approximately 6 seconds and then goes
out.
If the 75 indicator lamp
should not come on or is continuously lit,
the system is not functioning. You must
see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
before seating any child on the passenger
seat.
More information can be found in the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 355).
iThe system does not deactivate the side im-
pact air bag, the window curtain air bag and the
Emergency Tensioning Device.
Warning! G
The BabySmartTM air bag deactivation sys-
tem will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation sys-
tem. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
Warning! G
When using a BabySmartTM compatible child
seat on the front passenger seat, the front
passenger front air bag will not deploy only
if the 75 indicator lamp re-
mains illuminated.
Please be sure to check the indicator every
time you use the special system child seat.
Should the indicator lamp go out while the
restraint is installed, please check installa-
tion. If the indicator lamp remains out, do
not use the BabySmartTM restraint to trans-
port children on the front passenger seat un-
til the system has been repaired.
78
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Seat belts
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia, the
U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fas-
tened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
For more information, see “Fastening the
seat belts” (컄page 48).
Warning! G
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones, electronic tags such as those used
in ski passes and like electronic devices on
the front passenger seat. Signals from such
devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
system. Such signal interference may cause
the 75 indicator lamp not to
come on during self-test or be continuously
lit, indicating that the system is not function-
ing. iFor information on infants and children trav-
eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys-
tems for infants and children, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄page 84).
Warning! G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
sition your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
domen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning! G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
use a seat belt for more than one person at
a time.
Warning! G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this sec-
tion, as that could result in serious inju-
ries in case of an accident.
앫Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, includ-
ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver’s front air
bag, driver-side knee bag, front
passenger front air bag, side impact
air bags, window curtain air bags for
side windows), ETD (seat belt Emergen-
cy Tensioning Device), and front seat
knee bolsters. 컄컄
80
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < will always illuminate
for 6 seconds to remind you and your pas-
sengers to fasten your seat belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
when the engine is started, an additional
warning chime will also sound for a maxi-
mum of 6 seconds or until the driver’ s
seat belt is fastened.
The system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted oc-
cupants in certain frontal (front air bags,
driver-side knee bag and ETD) and side
(side impact and window curtain air
bags and ETD) impacts which exceed
preset deployment thresholds and in
certain rollovers (window curtain air
bags and ETD).
앫Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
der. In a frontal crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would in-
crease the chance of head and neck in-
juries. The seat belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal or-
gans such as your liver or spleen.
앫Never wear seat belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
such as eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys
etc., as these might cause injuries.
앫Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdo-
men. If the seat belt is positioned across
your abdomen, it could cause serious in-
juries in a crash.
앫Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another per-
son or other objects.
앫Seat belts should not be worn twisted.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full
width of the seat belt to distribute im-
pact forces. The twisted seat belt
against your body could cause injuries.
앫Pregnant women should also always use
a lap-shoulder seat belt. The lap belt
portion should be positioned as low as
possible on the hips to avoid any possi-
ble pressure on the abdomen.
앫Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫When using a seat belt to secure infant
or toddler restraints or children in boost-
er seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
컄컄
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened
with front doors closed,
앫the seat belt telltale < remains illu-
minated for as long as either the driv-
er’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened.
앫and if the vehicle speed once exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a
warning chime sounds with increasing
intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds
or until the driver’s and the front pas-
senger’s seat belt are fastened.
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s
seat belt remains unfastened after
60 seconds, the warning chime stops
sounding, the seat belt telltale <
stops flashing but continues to be illu-
minated.
The seat belt telltale < will only go out
if both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt (with the front passenger seat oc-
cupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
standing still and a front door is opened.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄page 348).
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
seats are equipped with Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the fol-
lowing cases:
앫in frontal or rear-end impacts exceed-
ing the system deployment threshold
앫in certain vehicle rollovers
앫if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see
1indicator lamp (컄page 64)
In an impact, Emergency Tensioning Devic-
es remove slack from the seat belts. Seat
belt force limiters reduce the peak force
exerted by the seat belts on occupants
during a crash.
iThe ETDs for the front seats will only acti-
vate if the front seat belts are fastened (latch
plate properly inserted into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate
with or without the respective seat belts fas-
tened.
Warning! G
An Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the Emergency Tension-
ing Device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
82
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
An automatic comfort-fit feature for front
seats reduces the retracting force of the
seat belts when they are in normal use.
Preventive occupant safety
(PRE-SAFE®)
Your vehicle automatically takes preven-
tive measures to better protect the occu-
pants in the following hazardous
situations:
앫You execute an emergency braking ma-
neuver and the Brake Assist System
(컄page 92) is activated.
앫The PRE-SAFE® system detects a criti-
cal driving dynamics situation.
In such cases, the following systems are
automatically activated:
앫The front seat belts are pre-tensioned
electrically.
앫If the vehicle is in a severe skid or is
spinning, the door windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof close until a small
gap remains.
Vehicles with front passenger seat memo-
ry function*:
앫If the seat is in an unfavorable position,
it will be adjusted to a better position.
If the seat belts do not release:
왘Adjust the backrest or seat slightly to
the rear until the seat belt tension is di-
minished.
The locking mechanism releases.
Warning! G
The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to re-
duce the effects of a crash on properly
seat-belted vehicle occupants. Despite hav-
ing the PRE-SAFE® system in your vehicle,
the possibility of injuries occurring as a re-
sult of an accident cannot be eliminated.
Therefore, you should always drive carefully
and adjust your driving to the prevailing
road, weather, and traffic conditions. iIf the closing procedure of the tilt/sliding
sunroof or door window is blocked, the tilt/slid-
ing sunroof or door window will stop and open
slightly.
iThe PRE-SAFE® system is activated in the
previously described circumstances only at
speeds exceeding 20 mph (30 km/h).
When the critical driving dynamic situation has
passed without an accident occurring, the
pre-tensioning on the seat belts is deactivated.
You can then adjust the seat, the door windows
and the tilt/sliding sunroof to their previous po-
sition.
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Active head restraints
The active head restraints offer the driver’s
and front passenger increased protection
from whiplash type injuries. In the event of
a rear-end collision, the active head re-
straints on the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seats are designed to move forward
in the direction of travel, providing the
head with increased support earlier on in
the collision sequence. The active head re-
straints move forward whether the seat is
occupied or not.
For information on resetting the activated
active head restraints, see “Resetting acti-
vated head restraints” (컄page 401).
You cannot remove the active head
restraint on the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seat.
For removal of the active head restraints
we recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For information on head restraint adjust-
ment, see “Seats” (컄page 41).
Warning! G
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the ac-
tive head restraints may not be able to func-
tion properly or offer the intended degree of
protection in the event of a collision.
Warning! G
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of active head restraint. Contact your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraints so that it is as close
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
84
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
왘Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child.
왘Make sure that the infant or child is
properly secured at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and
information on choosing an appropriate
restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Infant and child restraint systems
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Canada only:
Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
pull the shoulder belt out completely and
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is acti-
vated. The seat belt is now locked. Push
down on child restraint to take up any
slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual
manner.
Warning! G
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could
앫injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
앫be seriously or fatally injured through
exposure to extreme heat or cold
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
If children open a door, they could
앫injure other persons
앫get out of the car and injure themselves
or be injured by following traffic
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless
they are firmly secured in place. For more in-
formation, see “Loading” (컄page 239) and
“Useful features” (컄page 244).
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of
앫strong braking maneuvers
앫sudden changes of direction
앫an accident
85
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The use of infant or child restraints is re-
quired by law in all 50 states, the District
of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Ca-
nadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be seat-
ed in an appropriate infant or child re-
straint system properly secured in
accordance with the manufacturer's in-
structions for the child restraint, that com-
plies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadi-
an Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint manu-
facturer of compliance with these stan-
dards can be found on the instruction label
on the restraint and in the instruction man-
ual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and fol-
low all manufacturer’s instructions for in-
stallation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels af-
fixed to the inside of the vehicle and to in-
fant or child restraints.
Warning! G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
iInformation on child seats with mounting fit-
tings for tether anchorages (컄page 87).
For information on LATCH-type child seat
mounts (컄page 88).
Warning! G
Canada only: Children 12 years old and un-
der must never ride in the front seat, except
in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which
operates with the BabySmartTM system in-
stalled in the vehicle to deactivate the front
passenger front air bag when it is properly
installed. Otherwise they will be struck by
the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this
happens, serious or fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seat-
ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
and top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Always sit nearly upright, properly use the
seat belts and use an appropriately sized in-
fant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight
of the child. 컄컄
86
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following im-
portant information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫USA only: Your vehicle is equipped with
air bag technology designed to turn off
the front passenger front air bag in your
vehicle when the OCS senses the weight
of a typical 12-month-old child or less
along with the weight of a standard
appropriate child restraint on the front
passenger seat.
앫A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be serious-
ly injured or even killed if the front
passenger front air bag inflates in a
collision which could occur under some
circumstances, even with the air bag
technology installed in your vehicle.
The only means to completely eliminate
this risk is to never place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat. We therefore strongly recommend
that you always place a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the back
seat.
앫If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat be-
cause circumstances require you to do
so, make sure that the 59
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated. Should the
59 indicator lamp not illu-
minate or go out while the restraint is in-
stalled, please check installation.
Periodically check the 59
indicator lamp while driving to make
sure the lamp is illuminated.
If the 59 indicator lamp
goes out or remains out, do not trans-
port a child on the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be serious-
ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
senger front air bag inflates.
앫If you have to place a child in a for-
ward-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible, use the proper child
restraint recommended for the age, size
and weight of the child, and secure child
restraint with the vehicle’s seat belt ac-
cording to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions. For children larger than the
typical 12-month-old child, the front
passenger front air bag may or may not
be activated (컄page 72).
컄컄
87
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint
systems
This vehicle is equipped with tether an-
chorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seating positions.
1Cover
왘Remove cover 1 from anchorage ring.
왘Store cover 1 in a convenient place
(e.g. glove box).
왘Guide tether strap between head re-
straint and top of the seat back.
Head restraint must be positioned such
that the top tether strap can pass freely
between the head restraint and the top
of the seat back.
Make sure the tether strap is not
twisted.
Warning! G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
for children over 41 lb until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use,
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised chil-
dren in a child restraint system may use
vehicle equipment and may cause an acci-
dent and/or serious personal injury.
컄컄
88
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
2Hook
3Anchorage ring
왘Securely fasten the hook 2 to the
anchorage ring 3.
Once the top tether anchorage hook is
attached, the child restraint itself can be
secured. Tighten the top tether strap
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
Child seat anchors – LATCH type
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the rear seats) for
the installation of a “LATCH” child seat
with the matching mounting fittings.
The anchors are located behind an uphol-
stery blend.
1Indicates the position of the anchors
2Anchors
왘Lift upholstery blend up to access the
anchors.
왘Install child seat according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
iFor safety, make sure the hook 2 has at-
tached to the ring 3 beyond the safety catch, as
illustrated.
iNon-LATCH type child seats may also be
used and can be installed using the vehicle’s
seat belt system. Install child seat according to
the manufacturer’s instructions.
Warning! G
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper seat belt posi-
tioning for children over 41 lb until they
reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster.
Install child seat according to manufactur-
er’s instructions.
컄컄
89
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Blocking of rear door window operation
You can disable select functions in the rear
passenger compartment for added safety
(for instance when you have children riding
in the rear passenger compartment).
You can disable the following functions in
the rear passenger compartment:
앫rear door windows operation
앫12-V power outlet in the rear center
console
1Override switch
2Indicator lamp
왘Press override switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The func-
tions in the rear are disabled.
The child seat must be firmly attached to the
right and left side anchors 2.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious personal injury or death to the
child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be re-
placed.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
iOperation of the rear door windows with the
switches located on the door control panel of the
driver’s door is still possible.
Warning! G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure them-
selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
dow opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. access to an unlocked ve-
hicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a ve-
hicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
90
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
1Â button
Activating
왘Press and hold  button for at least
1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
Deactivating
왘Press  button again.
or
왘Insert SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch.
or
왘Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄page 39).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
be inside the vehicle.
iUSA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
iCanada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
91
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
왔Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
앫ABS (Antilock Brake System)
앫Adaptive Brake
앫BAS (Brake Assist System)
앫EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
앫ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
ABS
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) indepen-
dent of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even with light brake pressure.
The -indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when you switch on the
ignition. It goes out when the engine is run-
ning.
Braking
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode.
왘Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal while experiencing the pul-
sation.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-
tion of hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
Warning! G
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
앫Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫Following another vehicle too closely
The ABS, BAS, ESP® and Adaptive Brake
cannot reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the pre-
vailing road and weather conditions.
iIn winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of the ABS, BAS, ESP® and Adap-
tive Brake is only achieved with winter tires
(컄page 327) or snow chains as required.
Warning! G
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
92
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Emergency brake maneuver
왘Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄page 343).
BAS
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
tially reducing the braking distance.
왘Apply continuous full braking pressure
until the emergency braking situation is
over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
Warning! G
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS
and the ESP® are also switched off.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability and extending the brak-
ing distance.
Warning! G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction af-
forded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeop-
ardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Warning! G
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-
tem is still functioning normally, but without
the additional brake boost available that
BAS would normally provide in an emergen-
cy braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking
distance may increase.
Warning! G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
93
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Adaptive Brake
Adaptive Brake provides a high level of
braking safety as well as increased braking
comfort.
Important notes on using the brake
system
앫Following extended periods of only mi-
nor loads to your brake system, you
should occasionally apply the brakes
when traveling at high speeds. This im-
proves the grip of the brake pads.
앫After driving on wet or snow-covered
roads, you should apply your brakes
firmly before parking your vehicle. This
produces heat which serves to dry the
brake disks and help prevent corro-
sion.
앫On long and steep grades, shift to a
lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to
prevent the brakes from overheating
and to reduce brake wear.
앫After hard braking, it is advisable to
drive on for some time so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes fast-
er.
앫Only Mercedes-Benz approved compo-
nents (e.g. brake pads) should be in-
stalled on your vehicle. Brake pads not
approved by Mercedes-Benz may im-
pair the safety of your vehicle.
EBP
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)
enhances braking effectiveness by allow-
ing the rear brakes to supply a greater pro-
portion of the braking effort in straight line
breaking without a loss of vehicle stability.
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner which could jeopardize the us-
er’s safety or the safety of others.
Warning! G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Warning! G
When the EBP is malfunctioning, the ABS,
BAS, ESP® are also switched off.
If the EBP is malfunctioning, the brake sys-
tem will still function with full brake boost.
However, the rear wheels could lock up dur-
ing emergency braking situations, for exam-
ple. You could lose control of the vehicle and
cause an accident. Adapt your driving style
to the changed driving characteristics.
94
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
ESP®
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is run-
ning and monitors the vehicle’s traction
(force of adhesive friction between the
tires and the road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spin-
ning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By ap-
plying the brakes to the appropriate wheel
and by limiting engine output, the ESP®
works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is
especially useful while driving off and on
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
also stabilizes the vehicle during braking
and steering maneuvers.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP®
is engaged.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
Warning! G
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the in-
strument cluster. In this case proceed as fol-
lows:
앫While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫While driving, ease up on the accelera-
tor.
앫Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result-
ing from excessive speed.
Warning! G
The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP®
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The ca-
pabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner which could jeopardize the us-
er’s safety or the safety of others.
!The ESP® will only function properly if you
use wheels of the recommended tire size
(컄page 438).
95
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄page 343) and
(컄page 361).
Electronic traction system
The electronic traction system is a
component of ESP®.
The electronic traction system improves
the vehicle’s ability to utilize available
traction, especially under slippery road
conditions by applying the brakes to a
spinning wheel.
Except CLS 63 AMG:
When you switch off the ESP®, the
electronic traction system is still enabled.
Switching off the ESP®
Switching off the ESP®
(except CLS 63 AMG)
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch
off the ESP® in driving situations where it
would be advantageous to have drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
앫when driving with snow chains
앫in deep snow
앫in sand or gravel
!Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and the ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* in position 0
or 1) when:
앫the parking brake is being tested on a brake
test dynamometer
앫the vehicle is being towed with the front axle
raised
Active braking action through the ESP® may oth-
erwise seriously damage the brake system.
Warning! G
If you are driving too fast, the electronic
traction system cannot reduce the risk of an
accident.
The electronic traction system cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle.
Warning! G
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circum-
stances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in driving
maneuvers.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
96
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
When you switch off the ESP®
앫the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫the traction control will still apply the
brakes to a spinning wheel
앫the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking
앫you cannot activate the cruise control
or the Distronic*
앫the cruise control or Distronic* switch
off if currently activated
The switch is located on the center con-
sole.
1ESP® switch
왘With the engine running, press ESP®
switch 1 until the ESP® warning
lamp v in the instrument cluster
comes on.
The ESP® is switched off.
Warning! G
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the afore-
mentioned circumstances do not apply any-
more. Otherwise the ESP® will not stabilize
the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a
wheel is spinning.
iWhen the ESP® is switched off and one or
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warn-
ing lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes.
However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the ve-
hicle.
Warning! G
When the ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
!Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex-
tended period with the ESP® switched off. This
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
97
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP®
(CLS 63 AMG only)
When you switch off the ESP®
앫the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
앫the traction control will still apply the
brakes to a spinning wheel
앫the ESP® operates while you are brak-
ing
앫you cannot activate the cruise control
or the Distronic*
앫the cruise control or Distronic* switch
off if currently activated
The switch is located on the center
console.
1ESP® switch
왘With the engine running, press ESP®
switch 1 until the ESP® warning
lamp v in the instrument cluster
comes on.
The ESP® is switched off.
Warning! G
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving. Disabling of the system will
result in the following:
앫no restriction to engine torque
앫loss of system supported traction
control
“ESP® OFF” is designed for driving on closed
tracks when the natural oversteer and un-
dersteer characteristics are desired and re-
quires a highly skilled and experienced
driver able to handle these critical driving
situations.
You could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
Please be aware of these limits when you
switch off the ESP®.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
iWhen the ESP® is switched off and one or
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warn-
ing lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes.
However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the ve-
hicle.
98
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching on the ESP®
왘Press ESP® switch 1 until the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP® switched on.
Warning! G
When the ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers reduces.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
!Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex-
tended period with the ESP® switched off. This
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
99
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Activating
With the SmartKey
왘Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
ton once.
The engine is turned off.
왘Open the driver’s door.
Deactivating
With the SmartKey
왘Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2 (컄page 38).
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘Start the engine by means of the
start/stop button on the gear selector
lever.
Anti-theft alarm system
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
앫a door
앫the trunk
앫the hood
The alarm will stay on, even if the activat-
ing element (a door, for example) is imme-
diately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫someone attempts to raise the vehicle
(only vehicles with tow-away alarm)
앫the vehicle is opened with the
mechanical key
앫someone opens a door from the inside
iIn case the engine cannot be started (yet the
vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not
operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
100
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming the alarm system
The indicator lamp located in the central
locking switch in the center console.
1Indicator lamp
왘Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash three times
to indicate that the alarm system is
armed. The indicator lamp 1 begins to
flash after approximately 30 seconds
after arming the alarm system.
Disarming the alarm system
왘Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
or KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash once to
indicate that the alarm system is
disarmed.
Canceling the alarm
With the SmartKey
왘Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
왘Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘Pull an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
or
왘Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄page 39).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
be inside the vehicle.
iIf the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is ini-
tiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
(컄page 257) provided Tele Aid service was sub-
scribed to and properly activated, and that nec-
essary cellular service and GPS coverage are
available.
iIf the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times, one of the following elements may not be
properly closed:
앫a door
앫the trunk
Close the respective element and lock the vehi-
cle again.
iThe alarm system will rearm automatically
after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door
nor the trunk was opened.
101
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
4-zone automatic climate control
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
102
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to oper-
ate the equipment installed on your vehi-
cle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section
will be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are giv-
en at the beginning of each segment.
For more information on locking and
unlocking, see “Getting started”
(컄page 36) and (컄page 59).
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys are a differ-
ent color to help distinguish each
SmartKey unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
앫the doors
앫the trunk
앫the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote control
1‹Lock button
2ŠOpening button for trunk
(컄page 112)
3Mechanical key locking tab
4ŒUnlock button
5Battery check lamp
6ÂPanic button (컄page 90)
!To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ex-
posing the SmartKey to high levels of electro-
magnetic radiation.
103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible
for children to open a locked door from the
inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
iWhen you open a door, the side window on
that side lowers slightly. Once you close the
door, the window moves up again.
!The side windows will not open or close if
the battery is discharged or the windows are cov-
ered with ice. As a result, you may no longer be
able to properly close the door. Do not attempt
to force the door shut. Doing so may damage the
door or the side window. Correct the condition
that prevents the windows from operating before
attempting to close the door.
iUSA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
iCanada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
iYou can also open and close the windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel* us-
ing the SmartKey (컄page 210).
!If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehi-
cle with the SmartKey, then the batteries in the
SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is mal-
functioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
앫Check the batteries in the SmartKey
(컄page 105) and replace them if necessary
(컄page 402).
앫Use the mechanical key to unlock the driv-
er’s door (컄page 396) and the trunk
(컄page 397).
앫Have the vehicle battery checked by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
iWhen unlocking or locking the vehicle with
the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If you
wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust its signal
volume, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
104
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global unlocking
왘Press button Œ.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
locking if:
앫neither door nor trunk is opened
앫the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
앫the central locking switch is not
activated
Global locking
왘Press button ‹.
With the trunk and all doors closed:
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that press-
ing button Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door, the storage compartment under the
armrest, the glove box, and the fuel filler
flap.
왘Press and hold buttons Œand ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds un-
til battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as
follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘Press button Œ once.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫The locking knob on the driver’s
door move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
Global unlocking
왘Press button Œ twice.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
105
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking
왘Press button ‹.
With the trunk and all doors closed:
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Restoring to factory setting
왘Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds un-
til battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
each with remote control and a removable
mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys with
KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO unit.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is checked every time you pull an outside
door handle.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks
앫the doors
앫the trunk
앫the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
1‹ Lock button
2Š Opening button for trunk
(컄page 112)
3Mechanical key locking tab
4ΠUnlock button
5Battery check lamp
6Â Panic button (컄page 90)
!To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ex-
posing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
106
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children
to open a locked door from the inside, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
iWhen you open a door, the side window on
that side lowers slightly. Once you close the
door, the window moves up again.
!The side windows will not open or close if
the battery is discharged or the windows are cov-
ered with ice. As a result, you may no longer be
able to properly close the door. Do not attempt
to force the door shut. Doing so may damage the
door or the side window. Correct the condition
that prevents the windows from operating before
attempting to close the door.
iUSA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
iCanada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
iYou can also open and close the windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel* us-
ing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
(컄page 210).
!If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehi-
cle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then
the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged,
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunction-
ing or the vehicle battery is drained.
앫Check the batteries in the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO (컄page 105) and replace
them if necessary (컄page 402).
앫Use the mechanical key to unlock the driv-
er’s door (컄page 396) and the trunk
(컄page 397).
앫Have the vehicle battery checked by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunc-
tioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
107
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
앫You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(컄page 102).
앫You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-
tions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with button ‹).
앫Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
앫Never store the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO together with:
앫Electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO
앫Metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
앫To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within ap-
proximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
trunk lid.
앫In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
앫The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle.
앫The brake pedal must be firmly de-
pressed. Do not depress the accel-
erator.
앫If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehi-
cle, the system may no longer recog-
nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
The vehicle cannot be locked or the
engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
system.
앫If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re-
moved from the vehicle (e.g. if passen-
ger exits the vehicle with the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO)
앫when pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button or trying to lock
the vehicle with the outside door
handle the message
Key not rec-
ognized
appears in the multifunc-
tion display
앫with the engine running, the mes-
sage
Key not recognized
appears
in the multifunction display while
driving off.
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or
change its present location immediate-
ly (e.g. place it on the front passenger
seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
앫If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you
can turn it off again with:
앫the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
앫the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in-
serted in the starter switch, when
the automatic transmission is in
position P
108
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
vehicle.
Possibility 1: (One SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle):
If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, no message
appears in the multifunction display.
Possibility 2: (One SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle):
When exiting and trying to lock the ve-
hicle, the message
Key still in ve-
hicle
appears in the multifunction
display. The vehicle will not be locked.
Factory setting
Global unlocking
왘Pull an outside door handle.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds if:
앫neither a door nor the trunk is opened
앫the central locking switch is not acti-
vated
Global locking
왘Press lock button on an outside door
handle (컄page 62).
With the trunk and all doors closed:
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
iWhen unlocking or locking the vehicle with
the SmartKey or with the KEYLESS-GO function
an acoustic signal sounds. The acoustic signal is
activated at the factory. If you wish to deactivate
the feature, or adjust its signal volume, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
109
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO so when you pull the driver’s
outside door handle, only the driver’s door
and the fuel filler flap unlocks.
왘Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds un-
til battery check lamp 5 (컄page 105)
flashes twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘Pull the driver’s outside door handle.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫The locking knob in the driver’s
door moves up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
Global unlocking
왘Pull any outside door handle other than
the driver’s outside door handle.
앫All turn signal lamps flash once.
앫An acoustic signal sounds once.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
Global locking
왘Press lock button on an outside door
handle (컄page 62).
With the trunk and all doors closed:
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Restoring to factory setting
왘Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds un-
til battery check lamp 5 (컄page 105)
flashes twice.
Global locking using the KEYLESS-GO*
lock button on the trunk lid*
Depending on production date, your vehi-
cle may be equipped with the KEYLESS-GO
lock button on trunk lid.
1Lock button on trunk lid
110
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘Press lock button 1 on the trunk lid.
With the trunk and all doors closed:
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Checking batteries in the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
왘Press button ‹ or Œ.
The battery check lamp (컄page 102)
or (컄page 105) comes on briefly to in-
dicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in or-
der.
Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*
If you lose your SmartKey, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you
should do the following:
왘Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘Report the loss of the SmartKey,
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the me-
chanical key immediately to your car
insurance company.
왘Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to supply you with a replace-
ment.
iTo prevent a possible inadvertent lockout,
the trunk will open automatically if a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehi-
cle or in the trunk.
iYou can also lock the vehicle using the lock
button on an outside door handle (컄page 62) or,
vehicles with trunk opening/closing system*,
KEYLESS-GO locking/ closing switch
(컄page 116).
!If the battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄page 402).
You can obtain the required batteries at any au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
iIf the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing button ‹ or
Πwill lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.
111
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the in-
side. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
1Locking knob
2Inside door handle
Front doors
왘Pull on door handle 2 on the respec-
tive front door to open door.
If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
Rear doors
왘Pull up locking knob 1 on the
respective rear door to unlock door.
왘Pull on door handle 2 on the
respective rear door to open door.
iIf the vehicle has previously been locked
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a
door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
앫Press button Œ or ‹ on the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
앫Insert the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
앫Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄page 39).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
inside the vehicle.
앫Pull an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
iWhen you open a door, the side window on
that side lowers slightly. Once you close the
door, the window moves up again.
iIf you hear a warning signal you have forgot-
ten to switch off the headlamps before opening
the driver’s door.
In addition the message
Switch off lights
appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the headlamps.
112
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk
You can open the trunk if the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
Opening the trunk from the outside
1Trunk lid handle
왘Press and hold button Š on the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* until trunk unlocks and
begins to open.
or
왘Pull on handle 1.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The
vehicle must be unlocked.
Opening the trunk from the inside
Vehicles without trunk opening/closing
system*
1Remote trunk opening switch
Warning! G
Make sure the trunk is closed when the en-
gine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, such as blocked visibility, ex-
haust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
These fumes are damaging to your health.
!The trunk lid swings open upwards automat-
ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-
head clearance.
iIf the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (컄page 117).
!Vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
tem*: To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š on the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
113
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system*
1Remote trunk opening/closing* switch
왘Pull switch 1 until the trunk begins to
open.
The trunk opens. The indicator lamp in
the switch comes on and remains lit
until the trunk is closed.
Closing the trunk Closing trunk from the outside
manually
Depending on production date your vehicle
is equipped with two or three handles.
1Handles
왘Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
handles 1.
왘Close trunk with hands placed flat on
trunk lid.
iIf the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (컄page 117).
!Vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
tem*: To stop the opening procedure, press or
pull the remote trunk opening/closing* switch.
Warning! G
Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
other dangers such as blocked visibility, ex-
haust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
iDo not place the SmartKey in the open
trunk. You may lock yourself out.
iIf the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after
closing it. All turn signal lamps flash three times
to confirm locking.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possi-
ble inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open auto-
matically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk.
The vehicle is only locked when the turn signals
flash three times. If you are carrying a second
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, you can
still lock the vehicle.
컄컄
114
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the inside
automatically*
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
tem* you can close the trunk from the in-
side using the remote trunk opening/
closing* switch.
1Remote trunk opening/closing* switch
왘Press switch 1 until the indicator
lamp in the switch goes out and the
trunk is closed.
To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘Release switch 1.
Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are
around.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Warning! G
Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
the door mounted switch. Monitor the clos-
ing procedure carefully to make sure that no
one is in danger of being injured.
To interrupt the closing procedure, press or
pull the door mounted remote trunk open-
ing/closing* switch.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk
opening/closing* switch can be operated.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
iIf the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-
opens slightly.
컄컄
115
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing the trunk from the outside
automatically*
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
tem* you can close the trunk separately
from the outside using the trunk closing
switch.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*
1Trunk closing switch
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
1Trunk closing switch
왘Press switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.
Warning! G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being in-
jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
앫press button Š on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
앫press or pull the remote trunk open-
ing/closing* switch (on the driver’s
door)
앫press the trunk closing switch
앫press the KEYLESS-GO locking/clos-
ing* switch
앫pull the trunk lid handle
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk
opening/closing* switch can be operated.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
iIf the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-
opens slightly.
116
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Closing trunk and locking vehicle from
outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
tem* and KEYLESS-GO, you can close the
trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously
from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO
locking/closing switch.
1KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
왘Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
왘Press switch 1 briefly.
With all doors closed:
앫The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
앫The trunk starts to close automati-
cally.
앫All turn signal lamps flash three
times to confirm locking once the
trunk has closed completely.
앫An acoustic signal sounds three
times.
앫The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Trunk emergency release
With the emergency release button, the
trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.
1Emergency release button
왘Briefly press emergency release
button 1.
The trunk unlocks and the trunk opens.
iIf the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re-
opens slightly. iThe emergency release button unlocks and
opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still
or in motion.
117
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Illumination of the emergency release
button:
앫The button will flash for 30 minutes af-
ter opening the trunk.
앫The button will flash for 60 minutes af-
ter closing the trunk.
Valet locking
1Neutral position
2Locked
iThe emergency release button does not
open the trunk, if the vehicle battery is dis-
charged or disconnected.
iIf the vehicle has previously been locked us-
ing the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, the exterior
lamps will flash and the alarm will sound as the
trunk opens.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
앫Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
앫Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
앫Pull an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
앫Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
(컄page 39).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be in-
side the vehicle.
iTo deny any unauthorized person access to
the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehicle,
lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave
only the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* less its mechanical key with the
vehicle.
118
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘Close the trunk (컄page 113).
왘Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (컄page 396).
왘Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
왘Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2 to lock the trunk.
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
왘Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
lid lock.
왘Turn the mechanical key counterclock-
wise to neutral position 1 to unlock the
trunk.
You can now open the trunk
(컄page 112).
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk automatically lock
when the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap-
proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
The locking knobs in the doors move down.
You can open a locked door from the in-
side. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
You can deactivate the automatic locking
mode using the control system
(컄page 165).
Locking and unlocking from the inside
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
trunk from inside using the central locking
switch. This can be useful, for example, if
you want to lock the vehicle before starting
to drive.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-
locked with the central locking switch.
iYou can only cancel the separate trunk lock-
ing mode by means of the mechanical key.
iThe doors are designed to unlock automati-
cally after an accident if the force of the impact
exceeds a preset threshold. The vehicle locks au-
tomatically when the ignition is switched on and
the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of ap-
proximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could
therefore lock yourself out when the vehicle
앫is pushed or towed
앫is on a test stand
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
119
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Central locking switch
1Unlocking
2Locking
Locking
왘Press lower half 2 of the central lock-
ing switch.
If all doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.
Unlocking
왘Press upper half 1 of the central lock-
ing switch.
The vehicle unlocks.
iYou can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to do
so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO*, it will
not unlock using the central locking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the cen-
tral locking switch:
앫and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is set to factory settings, the
complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is
opened from the inside
앫and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is set to selective settings,
only the door opened from the inside is un-
locked
120
Controls in detail
Seats
For more information on seat adjustment,
see “Adjusting” (컄page 41).
For more information on folding the seats,
see “Loading” (컄page 239).
Front seat active head restraints
You cannot remove the active head re-
straint on the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s seats.
For removal of the active head restraints
we recommend that you contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
For information on head restraint adjust-
ment, see “Seat adjustment” (컄page 42).
For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraints” (컄page 83).
Rear seat head restraints
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the po-
tential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
iAdjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, always drive with the
rear head restraints in the upright position
when the rear seats are occupied.
Keep the area around head restraints clear
of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
Warning! G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
straint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
cident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
dent.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
iThe rear seat head restraints cannot be ad-
justed.
121
Controls in detail
Seats
Folding head restraints back
The rear seat head restraints can be folded
backward for increased visibility.
1Head restraint release switch
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Press the symbol-side on rocker
switch 1 to release the head re-
straints.
The head restraints will fold backward.
Placing head restraints upright
왘Pull the head restraint forward until it
locks into position.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the front seats can be ad-
justed to help enhance lower back support
and seating comfort.
1Adjustment lever
왘Move adjustment lever 1 in direction
of the arrows until you have reached a
comfortable seating position.
!Make sure the head restraints engage when
placing them upright. Otherwise their protective
function cannot be assured.
122
Controls in detail
Seats
Multicontour seat*
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the backrest to provide additional lum-
bar and side support.
The seat cushion movement, backrest
cushion height and curvature can be con-
tinuously varied with switches right side of
the seat on the driver side, or the left side
of the seat on the passenger side. 1Seat cushion depth
2Backrest bottom
3Backrest center
4Backrest side bolsters
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
Seat cushion depth
왘Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
length of your upper leg using
switch 1.
Backrest contour
왘Adjust the contour of the backrest to
the desired position using æ or
ç.
왘Move the backrest support cushion to
the bottom by using button 2 or to the
center by using button 3.
Backrest side bolsters
왘Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 4.
iIf, after a period of time, the seat no longer
provides the desired contour, then repeat the ad-
justment procedure.
123
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating*
The red indicator lamps on the switch
show the heating level selected.
1Front seat heating switch
1Rear seat heating switch (Canada only)
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
Switching seat heating on
왘Press switch 1.
Three red indicator lamps in the switch
come on.
왘Continue pressing switch 1 until de-
sired seat heating level is reached.
Switching seat heating off
왘Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in-
dicator lamps go out.
Level
3Three indicator lamps on
(highest level).
The seat heating automatically
switches to level 2 after approxi-
mately 5 minutes.
2Two indicator lamps on.
The seat heating automatically
switches to level 1 after approxi-
mately 10 minutes.
1One indicator lamp on
(lowest level).
The seat heating automatically
switches off after approximately
20 minutes.
off No indicator lamp on.
iIf one or more of the lamps on the seat heat-
ing switch are flashing, there is insufficient volt-
age available since too many electrical
consumers are turned on. The seat heating
switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again auto-
matically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail-
able.
124
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat ventilation*
The blue indicator lamps on the switch
show the ventilation level selected.
1Seat ventilation switch
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
Switching seat ventilation on
왘Press switch 1 repeatedly until the
desired ventilation level is set.
One or more blue indicator lamps on
the switch show the selected ventila-
tion level.
Switching seat ventilation off
왘Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in-
dicator lamps go out.
Level
3Three indicator lamps on
(highest level).
2Two indicator lamps on.
1One indicator lamp on
(lowest level).
off No indicator lamp on.
iThe seat ventilation for the driver’ seat can
be activated using summer opening feature
(컄page 210).
iIf one or more of the lamps on the seat ven-
tilation switch are flashing, there is insufficient
voltage available since too many electrical con-
sumers are turned on. The seat ventilation
switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on again au-
tomatically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail-
able.
125
Controls in detail
Memory function
왔Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver
should check and adjust the seat height,
seat position fore and aft, and seat back-
rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate
control, reach and comfort. The head re-
straint should also be adjusted for proper
height. See also the section on air bags
(컄page 66) for more information on prop-
er seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil-
dren should be seated in a properly se-
cured restraint system that complies with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
With the memory function you can store up
to three different settings.
Each stored position on the driver’s side in-
cludes the following settings:
앫Seat position and lumbar support
앫Multicontour seat*: previously saved
setting
앫Steering wheel position
앫Exterior rear view mirror positions
Each stored position on the passenger side
includes the following settings:
앫Seat position and lumbar support
앫Multicontour seat*: previously saved
setting
Warning! G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
126
Controls in detail
Memory function
MMemory button
1, 2, 3 Stored position button
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
or
왘Open the respective door.
Storing positions into memory
왘Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
exterior rear view mirrors to the de-
sired position (컄page 41).
왘Press memory button M.
왘Release memory button M and press
memory position button 1, 2 or 3 with-
in 3 seconds.
All the settings are stored to the select-
ed position.
Recalling positions from memory
왘Press and hold memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors
have completely moved to the stored
positions.
!Do not operate the power seats using the
memory button if the seat backrest is in an ex-
cessively reclined position. Doing so could cause
damage to front or rear seats.
First move seat backrest to an upright position.
iReleasing the memory position button stops
movement to the stored positions immediately.
The multicontour seat* will continue to be ad-
justed.
127
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position
For easier parking, you can adjust the pas-
senger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking
position, see “Activating exterior rear view
mirror parking position” (컄page 187).
1Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
2Adjustment button
3Memory button
왘Stop the vehicle.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Press button 1.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
왘Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 2 so that you see the rear
wheel and the road curb.
왘Press memory button M3.
왘Within 3 seconds, press bottom of ad-
justment button 2.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
iIf the mirror does move, repeat the above
steps. After the setting is stored, you can move
the mirror again.
128
Controls in detail
Lighting
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
“Switching on headlamps” (컄page 55)
and see “Turn signals” (컄page 55).
Exterior lamp switch
Exterior lamp switch
iIf you drive in countries where vehicles drive
on the other side of the road than the country
where the vehicle is registered, you must have
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
iVehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon*
headlamps: The active Bi-Xenon headlamps
monitor your steering angle and driving speed,
then automatically shift their beams to either
side to better follow the curvature of the road
ahead, increasing usable illumination over con-
ventional headlamps.
1‚Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
2ˆStanding lamps, right (turn left
one stop)
3MOff
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄page 130)
4UAutomatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄page 130)
5CParking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
6BLow beam headlamps or high
beam headlamps when the com-
bination switch is pushed for-
ward. The tail lamps, license
plate lamps, side marker lamps,
parking lamps and instrument
panel lamps also come on.
7‡Front fog lamps
8†Rear fog lamp
iIf you hear a warning signal you have forgot-
ten to switch off the headlamps before opening
the driver’s door.
In addition the message
Switch off lights
appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the headlamps.
129
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and the parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch.
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off au-
tomatically depending on the brightness of
the ambient light:
앫Low beam headlamps
앫Tail and parking lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Side marker lamps
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to posi-
tion U.
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button pressed once, only
the parking lamps and the side marker
lamps will switch on and off automati-
cally.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
side marker lamps will switch on and
off automatically.
Warning! G
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
앫the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
edly when the system senses bright
ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
앫the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, acti-
vate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
times.
iUSA only:
With the automatic headlamp mode activated
you can switch on the high beam headlamps in
low ambient lighting conditions.
130
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
왘Turn exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps are switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the fol-
lowing lamps will switch on additional-
ly:
앫Tail and parking lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Side marker lamps
Canada only
The daytime running lamp mode is manda-
tory and therefore in a constant mode.
When the engine is running, and you shift
from a driving position to position N or P,
the low beam headlamps will switch off
with a 3-minute delay.
When the engine is running, and you
앫turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C, the parking lamps and
the side marker lamps switch on addi-
tionally.
앫turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
mode has priority over the daytime run-
ning lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄page 128).
USA only
By default, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated. Activate the daytime run-
ning lamp mode using the control system,
see “Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)” (컄page 161).
When the engine is running, and you turn
the exterior lamp switch to position C
or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄page 128).
iWith the daytime running lamp mode activat-
ed and the engine running, the low beam head-
lamps cannot be switched off manually.
iWith the exterior lamp switch in position
M or U, you cannot switch on the high
beam headlamps.
The high beam flasher is available at all times.
For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior
lamp switch to position B to permit activa-
tion of the high beam headlamps.
iWith the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position M, you cannot switch on the high
beam headlamps.
The high beam flasher is available at all times.
For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior
lamp switch to position B or U to permit
activation of the high beam headlamps.
131
Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting and night security illu-
mination
Locator lighting and night security illumi-
nation are described in the “Control sys-
tem” section, see “Setting locator lighting”
(컄page 162) and “Setting night security il-
lumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off)”
(컄page 163).
Fog lamps
Front fog lamps
왘Switch on the low beam
headlamps B (컄page 55).
왘Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The front fog lamps switch on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄page 128).
왘Push in the exterior lamp switch.
The front fog lamps are switched off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
왘Switch on the low beam
headlamps B (컄page 55).
왘Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
stop.
The front fog lamps and the rear fog
lamp switch on.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄page 128).
왘Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
The rear fog lamp is switched off.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.
Warning! G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
iFog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding
permissible lamp operation.
iFog lamps cannot be switched on with the
exterior lamp switch in position U. To switch
on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch
to position B first.
132
Controls in detail
Lighting
Combination switch
Combination switch
1High beam
2High beam flasher
High beam
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B (컄page 128).
왘Push the combination switch in direc-
tion of arrow 1 to switch on the high
beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄page 26).
왘Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to its original position to
switch off the high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
goes out.
High beam flasher
왘Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2.
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*
(CLS 550 with Bi-Xenon* headlamps
only)
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps im-
prove illumination of the area in the direc-
tion into which you are turning.
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps will op-
erate with the engine running and with
앫the exterior lamp switch in
position B (컄page 128)
or
앫the exterior lamp switch in
position U (컄page 128)
or
앫the daytime running lamp mode
activated (컄page 130)
iWith the automatic headlamp mode activat-
ed: The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only come on in low ambient lighting conditions.
133
Controls in detail
Lighting
Driving forward
Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
왘Switch on the left or right turn signal
(컄page 55), depending on whether
you are turning left or right.
The respective front fog lamp comes on
and illuminates the area in the direc-
tion into which you are turning.
or
왘Turn steering wheel in desired direc-
tion.
The front fog lamp on the side of your
steering direction comes on.
Switching off corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
The combination switch for the turn signal
resets automatically after major steering
wheel movements. This will switch off the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
where activated by switching on the left or
right turn signal.
If the turn signal should stay on after mak-
ing the turn, the turn signal and corner-illu-
minating front fog lamps can be switched
off by returning the combination switch to
its original position.
iIf you are driving faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps switched
on, the corner-illuminating function is not avail-
able.
iIf you have switched on the turn signal for
one side but turn the steering wheel in the other
direction, the corner-illuminating lamp lights up
on the side of the turn signal.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp remains lit
for a maximum of three minutes. Afterward, it
goes out even if the turn signal is still switched
on.
iThe corner-illuminating front fog lamps tem-
porarily come on on both sides of the vehicle if
you turn the steering wheel in one direction and
then in the other direction shortly thereafter.
iThe corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
come on automatically depending on the steer-
ing angle, even if you did not switch on either
turn signal. If the corner-illuminating front fog
lamps came on automatically, they will also go
out automatically depending on the steering
angle.
iThere may be a brief delay before the cor-
ner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.
134
Controls in detail
Lighting
Driving in reverse
Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
왘Place the gear selector lever in
position R.
The front fog lamp opposite to your
steering direction comes on.
Switching off corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
왘Place the gear selector lever out of
position R.
The respective front fog lamp goes out.
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter switch
or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle.
The hazard warning flasher switches on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
The hazard warning flasher switch is locat-
ed on the center console.
1Hazard warning flasher switch
Switching on hazard warning flasher
왘Press the hazard warning flasher
switch 1.
All turn signals are flashing.
Switching off hazard warning flasher
왘Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
again.
iWith the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either left or
right turn, only the respective left or right turn
signals will operate when the ignition is switched
on.
iIf the hazard warning flasher has been acti-
vated automatically, press hazard warning flash-
er switch 1 once to switch off.
135
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting in the front
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
1Left front reading lamp on/off
2Rear interior lighting on/off
3Automatic control on/off
4Front interior lighting on/off
5Right front reading lamp on/off
6Interior lighting
7Ambient lighting
8Front reading lamps
Deactivating automatic control
왘Press switch 3.
The interior lighting remains switched
off in darkness, even when you:
앫unlock the vehicle
앫remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫open a door
앫open the trunk
Activating automatic control
왘Press switch 3.
The interior lighting switches on in
darkness, when you:
앫unlock the vehicle
앫remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫open a door
앫open the trunk
The interior lighting switches off after a
preset time (컄page 164).
!An interior lamp switched on manually does
not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON posi-
tion for extended periods of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged battery.
iThe interior lighting is factory-set to auto-
matic mode.
iIf a door remains open, the interior lamps
switch off automatically after approximately
5minutes.
136
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual control
Switching front/rear interior lighting on
and off
왘Press front/rear interior lighting
switch 4 or 2 to switch on the
desired interior light.
왘Press front/rear interior lighting
switch 4 or 2 again to switch off the
respective interior light.
Switching front reading lamps on and off
The front reading lamps are located in the
interior rear view mirror.
왘Press front reading lamp
switch 1or 5 to switch on the
desired front reading lamp.
왘Press front reading lamp
switch 1or 5 again to switch off the
respective front reading lamp.
Ambient lighting
You can switch the ambient lighting 7
(컄page 135) on and off, using the “Control
system” (컄page 163).
Interior lighting in the rear
The overhead control panel is located
above the rear seat bench.
1Ambient lighting switch, to brighten
2Right reading lamp
3Right reading lamp on/off
4Rear interior lamp
5Ambient lighting
6Ambient lighting switch, to dim
7Left reading lamp on/off
8Left reading lamp
137
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear reading lamps
왘Press rear reading lamp switch 3
or 7 to switch on the respective rear
reading lamp.
왘Press rear reading lamp switch 3
or 7 again to switch off the respective
rear reading lamp.
Ambient lighting
왘Press ambient lighting switch 1or 6
repeatedly until ambient lighting 5
has reached the desired intensity.
You can switch the ambient lighting on and
off, using the “Control system”
(컄page 163).
Door entry lamps
For better orientation in the dark, the cor-
responding door entry lamps will switch on
in darkness when you open a door and the
automatic control is activated.
The door entry lamps will switch off when
the corresponding door is closed.
Trunk lamp
The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is
opened.
If the trunk remains open, the trunk light-
ing switches off automatically after ap-
proximately 10 minutes.
iIf you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the head-
lamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for ap-
proximately 5 minutes.
138
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “At a glance” (컄page 26).
1Reset button
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
앫open a door
앫switch on the ignition
앫press the reset button 1
앫switch on the exterior lamps
You can modify the instrument cluster set-
tings in the instrument cluster submenu of
the control system (컄page 157).
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination
Use the reset button (컄page 138) to ad-
just the illumination brightness for the in-
strument cluster.
To brighten illumination
왘Turn the reset button (컄page 138)
clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
To dim illumination
왘Turn the reset button (컄page 138)
counterclockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
Warning! G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
play is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
mation about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warn-
ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
iThe instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit am-
bient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also be
adjusted automatically when you switch on the
vehicle’s exterior lamps.
139
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Coolant temperature indicator
Resetting trip odometer
Make sure you are viewing the trip odome-
ter display (컄page 141).
왘If it is not displayed, press the è or
ÿ repeatedly until the trip odome-
ter appears.
왘Press and hold the reset button
(컄page 138) until the trip odometer is
reset.
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer de-
notes excessive engine speed.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
Warning! G
앫Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
앫Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam com-
ing from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
!Excessive coolant temperature triggers the
coolant temperature warning lamp (컄page 347)
and a warning in the multifunction display
(컄page 374).
The engine should not be operated with the cool-
ant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so
may cause serious engine damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warran-
ty.
iDuring severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248°F (120°C).
!Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as
it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warran-
ty.
140
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Outside temperature indicator
The outside temperature is displayed in
the instrument cluster (컄page 26).
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by com-
parison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
perature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Warning! G
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
141
Controls in detail
Control system
왔Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 or as soon as the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* is in
position 1. The control system enables you
to:
앫call up information about your vehicle
앫change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control sys-
tem to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the multifunction display, and
much more.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
Multifunction display
1Outside temperature
2Trip odometer
3Automatic transmission program mode
4Main odometer
5Current gear selector lever position
Above illustration shows the standard
display.
For more information on menus displayed
in the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(컄page 144).
iThe displays for the audio systems (radio,
CD player) will appear in English, regardless of
the language selected.
Warning! G
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions per-
mit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 14 m) every second.
142
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system
(컄page 141) are controlled by the buttons
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Depending on the selected menu
(컄page 145), pressing the buttons on the
multifunction steering wheel will alter what
is shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunc-
tion display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or sub-
menus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-
erations under
AUDIO
, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant informa-
tion or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
1Multifunction display in the speed-
ometer
Operating the control system
2Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume:
Press button
æup/to increase
çdown/to decrease
3Telephone*:
Press button
sto take a call
to dial
to redial
tto end a call
to reject an incoming call
4Menu systems:
Press button
èfor next menu
ÿfor previous menu
5Moving within a menu:
Press button
jfor next display
kfor previous display
143
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
앫If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
앫If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the
Settings
menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For
instructions on using these submenus, see
the “Settings menu” section (컄page 154).
The number of menus available in the sys-
tem depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
The menus are described on the following
pages.
144
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
145
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1Menu 2Menu 3Menu 4Menu 5
Standard display AMG1
1AMG vehicles only.
AUDIO NAV* Distronic*
(컄page 147) (컄page 147) (컄page 150) (컄page 152) (컄page 153)
Commands/submenus
Digital speedometer Engine oil temperature Selecting radio station Showing route guidance
instructions, current
direction traveled
Calling up settings
Calling up maintenance
system display
Vehicle supply voltage Selecting satellite radio
station*
Checking tire inflation
pressure
RACETIMER Operating CD player
Overall analysis
Lap analysis
146
Controls in detail
Control system
Menu 6Menu 7Menu 8Menu 9
Vehicle status message
memory1
1The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
Settings Trip computer TEL*
(컄page 153) (컄page 154) (컄page 167) (컄page 168)
Commands/submenus
Calling up vehicle malfunction,
warning and system status
messages stored in memory
Resetting to factory settings Fuel consumption statistics
since start
Loading phone book
Instrument cluster submenu Fuel consumption statistics
since the last reset
Searching for name in phone
book
Time/Date submenu Resetting fuel consumption
statistics
Lighting submenu Distance to empty
Vehicle submenu
Convenience submenu
iThe headings used in the menus table are
designed to facilitate navigation within the sys-
tem and are not necessarily identical to those
shown in the control system displays.
The first function displayed in each menu will au-
tomatically show you which part of the system
you are in.
147
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu
왘Press button k or j repeatedly
to select the functions in the standard
display menu.
The following functions are available:
Display digital speedometer
왘Press button k or j repeatedly
until the digital speedometer appears
in the multifunction display.
AMG menu
The main screen of the AMG menu shows
you the gear currently engaged as well as
the engine oil temperature.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the AMG menu appears.
1Gear indicator
2Engine oil temperature
Use buttons k or j to select the
following functions in the AMG menu:
Function Page
Calling up digital speedometer 147
Calling up maintenance display 329
Checking tire inflation pressure 302
iThis function is only available in AMG vehi-
cles.
iThe engine oil temperature symbol flashes if
the engine oil temperature has not yet reached
80°C. During this time, avoid driving at full en-
gine speed.
Function Page
Vehicle supply voltage 148
RACETIMER 148
Overall analysis 150
Lap analysis 150
iIf the engine reaches the overspeed range in
the manual shift program, the menu will be
shown in red. In addition, you will see
UP
next to
gear indicator 1 as a reminder to upshift.
148
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle supply voltage
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the AMG menu appears.
왘Press button j repeatedly until you
see the vehicle supply voltage.
1Gear indicator
2Vehicle supply voltage
RACETIMER
The RACETIMER allows you to time and
save driving stretches in hours, minutes
and seconds.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
왘Press button j repeatedly until you
see the RACETIMER.
1Gear indicator
2RACETIMER
3Lap
Starting the RACETIMER
왘Press button æ.
The timer starts.
Warning! G
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on
roads and in conditions where high speed
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads
is prohibited under all circumstances and
the driver is and must always remain re-
sponsible for following posted speed limits. iYou can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 (컄page 38).
iWhile the RACETIMER is being displayed,
you cannot adjust the volume using
buttons æ or ç.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
Displaying intermediate time
왘Press button ç while the timer is
running.
The intermediate time is shown for
5 seconds.
Stopping the RACETIMER
왘Press button æ.
The timer stops.
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
왘Press button ç while the timer is
running.
The intermediate time will be shown for
5 seconds.
왘Press button ç within the next
5 seconds.
The intermediate time shown will be
saved as a lap time.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new
lap. The new lap begins to be timed as
soon as the intermediate time is called
up.
1Gear indicator
2RACETIMER
3Best lap time
4Lap number
Resetting current lap
왘Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
왘Press button ç.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
Deleting all laps
왘Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
왘Press the reset button twice
(컄page 26).
왘Press button æ.
The timer starts. The saved laps are de-
leted.
iWhen you stop the vehicle and turn the
Smartkey to position 1 (컄page 38) or, in vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine and
do not open the driver’s door, the RACETIMER
stops timing. Timing is resumed when you
switch the ignition back on (컄page 38) or
restart the engine (컄page 51) and then press
the æbutton.
iYou can save up to nine laps.
iIt is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
iWhen you switch off the engine, the
RACETIMER will be reset to “0” after
30 seconds. All laps are deleted.
150
Controls in detail
Control system
Overall analysis
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
왘Press button j repeatedly until you
see the overall analysis.
1Overall analysis of RACETIMER
2Overall driving time
3Maximum speed
4Overall distance driven
5Average speed
Lap analysis
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
왘Press button j repeatedly until you
see the lap analysis.
1Lap number
2Lap time
3Maximum speed
4Lap length
5Average speed during lap
왘Press button j or k to see other
lap analyses.
AUDIO menu
The functions in the
AUDIO
menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message
AUDIO off
is shown in the
multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
iThese functions are only available if you
have saved at least one lap and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
iThese functions are only available if you
have saved at least two laps and have stopped
the RACETIMER.
iEach lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1.
Function Page
Selecting radio station 151
Selecting satellite radio station* 151
Operating CD player 151
151
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting radio station
왘Turn on COMAND and select radio.
Refer to separate COMAND operating
instructions.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the currently tuned station in the
multifunction display appears.
1Waveband setting
2Station frequency
왘Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
Selecting satellite radio station*
(USA only)
The satellite radio is treated as a radio
application.
왘Select SAT radio with the correspond-
ing softkey in the radio menu.
1SAT mode and preset number
2Setting for station selection using
memory
3Channel name or number
왘Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired channel is found.
Operating CD player
Selecting CD track
왘Turn on COMAND and select CD or
CD changer. Refer to separate
COMAND operating instructions.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played appear in the multifunc-
tion display.
iYou can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio, see separate
operating instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the usual man-
ner.
iAdditional optional satellite radio equipment
and a subscription to satellite radio service pro-
vider are required for satellite radio operation.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for details and availability for your vehicle.
For more information, refer to separate
COMAND operating instructions.
iThe COMAND system and the CD changer
can play audio CDs as well as MP3-CDs.
For more information on operating the
CD changer refer to separate COMAND operat-
ing instructions.
컄컄
152
Controls in detail
Control system
1Current CD (for CD changer)
2Current track
왘Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
Selecting MP3-CD track
왘Turn on COMAND and select CD or
CD changer*. Refer to separate
COMAND operating instructions.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the MP3-CD cur-
rently being played appear in the multi-
function display.
1MP3 mode
2Current track
NAV* menu
The
NAV
menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the message
NAV
appears in the
multifunction display.
앫If COMAND is switched off, the mes-
sage
NAV off
is shown in the multi-
function display.
앫With COMAND switched on but route
guidance not activated, the direction of
travel and, if available, the name of the
street currently traveled on appear in
the multifunction display.
앫With COMAND switched on and route
guidance activated, the direction of
travel and maneuver instructions ap-
pear in the multifunction display.
Please refer to the COMAND manual for
instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system.
iTo select a CD from the CD changer maga-
zine, press a number on the COMAND system
key pad located in the center console.
iLevel of information displayed will vary de-
pending on the information contained on the
MP3-CD insert in the single CD player of the
COMAND system.
To select a MP3-CD from the CD changer maga-
zine, press a number on the COMAND system
key pad located in the center console.
컄컄
153
Controls in detail
Control system
Distronic* menu
Use the Distronic menu to display the cur-
rent settings for your Distronic system.
What information is shown in the multi-
function display depends on whether the
Distronic system is active or inactive.
Please refer to the “Driving systems”
section of this manual (컄page 218) for
instructions on how to activate Distronic.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until one of the following two pictures
appears in the multifunction display.
Distronic deactivated
When Distronic is deactivated, you will see
the standard display in the multifunction
display.
1Vehicle ahead, if detected
2Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4Your vehicle
5Symbol for activated distance warning
function
Distronic activated
With Distronic activated, the
Distronic
display is shown in the multifunction dis-
play and one or two segments around the
set speed are illuminated in the speedom-
eter.
1Distronic activated
Vehicle status message memory menu
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the sys-
tem. Such messages appear in the multi-
function display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system has recorded.
154
Controls in detail
Control system
The vehicle status message memory menu
only appears if there are any messages
stored.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the vehicle status message mem-
ory appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
Vehicle status messages have been
recorded
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction
display:
왘Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be dis-
played in the order in which they have
occurred. For malfunction and warning
messages, see “Vehicle status messag-
es in the multifunction display”
(컄page 356).
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunc-
tion display when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
Settings menu
In the
Settings
menu there are two func-
tions:
앫The function
To reset: Press reset
button for 3 seconds
, with which you
can reset all the settings to the original
factory settings.
앫A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
Warning! G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are inten-
tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a remind-
er with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages (컄page 356).
iThe vehicle status message memory will be
cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the start-
er switch to position 1 or 2. You will then only
see high priority messages in the multifunction
display (컄page 356).
155
Controls in detail
Control system
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the
Settings
menu is seen in the
multifunction display.
Resetting all settings
You can reset all the functions of all sub-
menus to the factory settings.
왘Press the reset button (컄page 138) for
approximately 3 seconds.
In the multifunction display you will see
the request to press the reset button
again to confirm.
왘Press the reset button again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
Submenus in the Settings menu
왘Press button j.
In the multifunction display the collec-
tion of the submenus appears.
왘Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with the çbutton, scroll up
with the æbutton.
With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use the j button to access
the individual functions within that sub-
menu. Once within the submenu, you can
use the button jto move to the next
function or the button k to move to the
previous function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
iThe settings you have changed will not be re-
set unless you confirm the action by pressing the
reset button a second time. After approximately
five seconds, the
Settings
menu reappears in
the multifunction display.
For safety reasons, the
Headlamp mode
func-
tion in the
Lighting
submenu is not reset
while driving.
156
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pag-
es.
Instrument cluster Time/Date Lighting Vehicle Convenience
(컄page 157) (컄page 159) (컄page 161) (컄page 164) (컄page 165)
Selecting speedometer
display mode
Synchronizing the time Setting daytime running
lamp mode (USA only)
Setting automatic
locking
Activating
easy-entry/exit feature
Selecting language Setting time (hours) Setting locator lighting Audio search function Setting parking position
for exterior rear view mir-
ror1
1If equipped
Selecting display (speed
display or outside tem-
perature) for status line
Setting time (minutes) Setting ambient lighting
Selecting display (speed
display or outside tem-
perature) for basic dis-
play
Setting date (month) Setting night security illu-
mination
Setting date (day) Setting interior lighting
delayed shut-off
Setting date (year)
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Access the
Instr. cluster
submenu via
the
Settings
menu. Use the
Instr. clus-
ter
submenu to change the instrument
cluster display settings. The following
functions are available:
Selecting speedometer display mode
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Instr.
cluster
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Display unit
Speed-/odometer
appears in the multi-
function display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to set
speedometer unit to
km
or
miles
.
Selecting language
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Instr.
cluster
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Language
appears in
the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Function Page
Selecting speedometer display
mode
157
Selecting language 157
Selecting display (speed display
or outside temperature) for sta-
tus display
158
Selecting display (speed display
or outside temperature) for basic
display
158 컄컄
158
Controls in detail
Control system
왘Press button æ or ç to select
the language to be used for the multi-
function display messages.
Available languages:
앫German
앫English
앫French
앫Italian
앫Spanish
앫Dutch
앫Danish
앫Swedish
앫Portuguese
앫Turkish
앫Russian (Canada only)
Selecting display (speed display or out-
side temperature) for status line display
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Instr.
cluster
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Status line dis-
play
appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to select
the status line to
Speed
or
Outside
temp.
Selecting display (speed display or out-
side temperature) for basic display
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Instr.
cluster
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Basic display
ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to select
the display permanently shown in the
multifunction display.
iYou will see the status indicator when you
have called up a different display from the stan-
dard display.
컄컄
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu
Access the
Time/Date
submenu via the
Settings
menu. Use the
Time/Date
sub-
menu to change the time and date display
settings. The following functions are avail-
able:
Synchronizing the time
This function can only be seen on vehicles
with COMAND and navigation module*.
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Time, synchroniz.
with Head Unit
appears in the multi-
function display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to select
the desired setting.
Setting time (hours)
This function can only be seen when time
synchronization is switched off.
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Time, hours Press
R to confirm
appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the hour set-
ting.
왘Press button æ or ç to set the
hour.
왘Confirm by pressing reset button
(컄page 138).
Function Page
Synchronizing the time 159
Setting time (hours) 159
Setting time (minutes) 160
Setting date (month) 160
Setting date (day) 160
Setting date (year) 161
iInformation on setting the time, refer to sep-
arate COMAND instructions.
160
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting time (minutes)
This function can only be seen when time
synchronization is switched off.
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Time, minute(s)
Press R to confirm
appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the minute
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to set the
minutes.
왘Confirm by pressing reset button
(컄page 138).
Setting date (month)
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Set date Month
ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the month
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to set the
month.
Setting date (day)
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Set date Day
ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the day
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to set the
day.
161
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting date (year)
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Time/Date
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Set date Year
ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the year
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to set the
year.
Lighting submenu
Access the
Lighting
submenu via the
Settings
menu. Use the
Lighting
sub-
menu to change the lamp and lighting set-
tings on your vehicle. The following
functions are available:
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
왘Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Lighting
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Headlamp mode
ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to select
manual operation (
manual
) or daytime
running lamp mode (
constant
).
Function Page
Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)
161
Setting locator lighting 162
Setting ambient lighting 163
Setting night security illumina-
tion
163
Setting interior lighting delayed
shut-off
164
iThis function is not available in countries
where the daytime running lamp mode is manda-
tory and therefore in a constant mode.
컄컄
162
Controls in detail
Control system
With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position M or U, the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the
engine is running.
In low ambient light conditions the follow-
ing lamps will switch on additionally:
앫Parking lamps
앫Tail lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Side marker lamps
For more information on the daytime
running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
(컄page 128).
Setting locator lighting
With the locator lighting feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U, the following lamps will
switch on during darkness when the vehi-
cle is unlocked with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*:
앫Parking lamps
앫Tail lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Side marker lamps
앫Front fog lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened.
If you do not open a door after unlocking
the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
will switch off automatically after approxi-
mately 40 seconds.
왘Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Lighting
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Function Surround
lighting
appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to switch
the locator lighting function
On
or
Off
.
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is activat-
ed.
iFor safety reasons, resetting the
Lighting
submenu to factory settings while driving
(컄page 155) will not deactivate the daytime
running lamp mode.
The following message appears in the multifunc-
tion display:
Cannot be completely reset
to factory settings while driving.
컄컄
163
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting ambient lighting
Use this function to adjust the brightness
of the ambient lighting.
왘Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Lighting
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Ambient light lev-
el
appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to select
the desired brightness of the ambient
lighting.
The setting
1
represents the darkest
level and setting
5
the brightest level.
The ambient light is switched off at
setting
0
.
Setting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)
Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to remain on for
15 seconds during darkness after exiting
the vehicle and closing all doors.
With the delayed shut-off feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position U before the engine is turned
off, the following lamps will switch on
when the engine is turned off.
앫Parking lamps
앫Tail lamps
앫License plate lamps
앫Side marker lamps
앫Front fog lamps
If after turning off the engine you do not
open a door or do not close an opened
door, the lamps will automatically switch
off after 60 seconds.
왘Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Lighting
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Headlamps delayed
shut-off
appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to switch
the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
On
or
Off
.
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the
engine.
The headlamps delayed shut-off fea-
ture is activated.
164
Controls in detail
Control system
You can temporarily deactivate the de-
layed shut-off feature:
왘Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
왘Then turn it to position 2 and back to
position 0.
The delayed shut-off feature is deacti-
vated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
ton on the gear selector lever
(컄page 39).
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether you would
like the interior lighting to remain lit during
darkness for 10 seconds after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the
Lighting
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Interior lighting
delayed shut-off
appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to switch
the interior lighting delayed shut-off
feature
On
or
Off
.
Vehicle submenu
Access the
Vehicle
submenu via the
Settings
menu. Use the
Vehicle
sub-
menu to make general vehicle settings.
The following functions are available:
Function Page
Setting automatic locking 165
Audio search function 165
165
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting automatic locking
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the au-
tomatic central locking system activated,
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Vehicle
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Automatic door
locking
appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to switch
Automatic door locking On
or
Off
.
Setting station selection mode
Use the
Audio search function
to select
the manual or memory station selection
mode for the radio (컄page 150).
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Vehicle
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Audio search func-
tion
appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press æ or ç to select the de-
sired station selection mode. You can
select:
앫
frequenc.
앫
memory
selects next stored station
Convenience submenu
Access the
Convenience
submenu via the
Settings
menu. Use the
Convenience
submenu to change the settings for a num-
ber of convenience features. The following
functions are available:
Function Page
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature
166
Setting parking position for exte-
rior rear view mirror1
1If equipped
166
166
Controls in detail
Control system
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deacti-
vate the easy-entry/exit feature
(컄page 45).
왘Move the selection marker with the
æ or çbutton to the
Convenience
submenu.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Easy-entry func-
tion
appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘Press button æ or ç to switch
Easy-entry function On
or
Off
.
Setting parking position for exterior rear
view mirror
Depending on production date, your vehi-
cle may not be equipped with this function.
Use the
Mirror adjust. parking aid
function to select whether the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneu-
vers when reverse gear R is engaged. For
additional information, see “Activating ex-
terior rear view mirror parking position”
(컄page 187).
왘Move the selection marker to the
Convenience
submenu using the æ
or çbutton.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see
Mirror adjust. parking
aid
in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Warning! G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
the following:
앫Move steering wheel adjustment stalk
(컄page 44).
앫Press one of the memory position but-
tons or the memory button M
(컄page 126).
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
167
Controls in detail
Control system
왘Press button æ or ç to switch
function
On
or
Off
.
Trip computer menu
Use the trip computer menu to call up sta-
tistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Fuel consumption statistics since start
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip com-
puter menu appears.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
From start
appears
in the multifunction display.
1Distance driven since start
2Time elapsed since start
3Average speed since start
4Average fuel consumption since start
Fuel consumption since last reset
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip com-
puter menu appears.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Since reset
ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
1Distance driven since last reset
2Time elapsed since last reset
3Average speed since last reset
4Average fuel consumption since last
reset
Function Page
Fuel consumption statistics
since start
167
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
167
Resetting fuel consumption
statistics
168
Distance to empty 168
iAll statistics stored since the last engine
start will be reset approximately 4 hours after
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
168
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip com-
puter menu appears.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the reading that you want to reset
in the multifunction display appears.
왘Press and hold the reset button
(컄page 138) until the value is reset
to
0
.
Distance to empty
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the first function of the trip com-
puter menu appears.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Range:
appears in
the multifunction display.
The calculated remaining driving range
based on the current fuel tank level ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
TEL* menu
iIf only very little fuel is left in the tank, a ve-
hicle at the fuel pump is shown instead of the
range.
Warning! G
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
phone call. If you choose to use the tele-
phone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the tele-
phone when weather, road and traffic condi-
tions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a
vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 14 m) every second.
169
Controls in detail
Control system
You can use the functions in the
Tel
menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
왘Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until the
Tel
menu appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
Which messages will appear in the multi-
function display depends on whether your
telephone is switched on or off:
앫If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is:
TEL off
.
앫If the telephone is on:
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the multi-
function display is empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network,
READY
appears in the multi-
function display.
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can
operate it using the control system.
Answering a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the multifunction display you will then see
the message or if supported, the caller ID
(name and number):
왘Press button s.
You have answered the call. In the mul-
tifunction display you see the length of
the call.
Ending and rejecting a call
왘Press button t.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
170
Controls in detail
Control system
Dialing a number from the phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the
Tel
menu appears in the
multifunction display.
왘Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take several minutes. In the
multifunction display you will see the
message
Please wait
.
When the message
Please wait
dis-
appears, the phone book has been
loaded.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
The stored names are displayed in as-
cending or descending alphabetical
order.
왘Press button s.
The system dials the selected phone
number.
앫If the connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the multifunction display.
앫If no connection is made, the con-
trol system stores the dialed num-
ber in the redial memory.
Redialing
The control system stores the most recent-
ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
왘Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the
Tel
menu appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
왘Press button s.
In the multifunction display the first
number in the redial memory appears.
왘Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
왘Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
iIf you press and hold j or k for long-
er than 1 second, the system scrolls rapidly
through the list of names until you release the
button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by pressing t.
171
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왔Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an
automatic transmission, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄page 51).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjust-
ments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its shift program.
Gear selector lever
The gear selector lever is located on the
lower part of the center console.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
PPark position
RReverse gear
NNeutral
DDrive position
iDuring the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic
converter to heat up more quickly to operating
temperature.
Warning! G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
structing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
iThe current gear selector lever position P,
R,N or D appears in the multifunction display
(컄page 173).
172
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
An additional indication of the current gear
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate.
The indicators come on when you activate
a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or
opening a door) and go out after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
Shifting procedure
The automatic transmission selects indi-
vidual gears automatically, depending on:
앫gear selector lever position D
(컄page 173) with gear ranges
(컄page 176)
앫the selected program mode:
(C/S)(
컄page 177)
or
(M/C/S) (CLS 63 AMG only)
(컄page 181)
앫the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄page 175)
앫the vehicle speed
When the gear selector lever is in drive
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by:
앫limiting the gear range
앫changing gears manually
Warning! G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
!Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
173
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever positions
The current gear selector lever position
appears in the multifunction display.
1Current gear selector lever position
Effect
ìPark position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in park
position P only when vehicle is
stopped. The park position is not
intended to serve as a brake
when the vehicle is parked.
Rather, the driver should always
set the parking brake in addition
to placing the gear selector lever
in park position P to secure the
vehicle.
Effect
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
park position P. With the
SmartKey removed, the gear
selector lever is locked in park
position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in park position P
(컄page 398).
íReverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
174
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Effect
ëNeutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
To avoid damage to the trans-
mission, never engage neutral
position N while driving.
If the ESP® is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Move gear selector lever to neu-
tral position N only if the vehicle
is in danger of skidding, e.g. on
icy roads.
êDrive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.
!Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
reason with gear selector lever in neutral
position N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear
selector lever not fully engaged in park
position P is dangerous. Also, park
position P alone is not intended to or capa-
ble of preventing your vehicle from moving,
possibly hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to park position P (컄page 53).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could move the
gear selector lever from park position P,
which could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
175
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Driving tips
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
More throttle Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
transmission shifts into a lower gear.
왘Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
The transmission shifts up again.
Stopping
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
왘Leave the transmission in gear.
왘Hold the vehicle with the brake.
When you stop for a longer period of time
with the engine idling and/or on a hill:
왘Set the parking brake.
왘Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
Maneuvering
When you maneuver in tight areas,
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
왘Control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes.
왘Accelerate gently.
왘Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
Working on the vehicle
Warning! G
When working on the vehicle, set the
parking brake and move gear selector lever
to park position P. Otherwise the vehicle
could roll away.
176
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in drive
position D and driving in program mode C
or S (컄page 177), you can select a gear
range for the automatic transmission to
operate within.
Gear selector lever (컄page 178):
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and
reverse the gear range limit by pressing
the gear selector lever to the right (D+).
Steering wheel gearshift control*
(컄page 179):
You can limit the gear range by pulling the
left gearshift paddle on the steering wheel
gearshift control, and reverse the gear
range limit by pulling the right gearshift
paddle on the steering wheel gearshift
control.
The selected gear range appears in the
multifunction display.
1Current gear range
Effect
ïThe transmission shifts through
sixth gear only.
îThe transmission shifts through
fifth gear only.
éThe transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
Effect
èThe transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
çThe transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving
앫on steep downgrades
앫in mountainous regions
앫under extreme operating
conditions
æThe transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
177
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic shift program
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
Program mode selector switch
C Comfort For comfort driving
S Sport For standard driving
Program mode selector switch
(CLS 63 AMG only)
M Manual For manual gear shifting
(컄page 181)
C Comfort For standard driving
S Sport For sporty driving
The selected program mode appears in the
multifunction display.
1Current program mode
!Never change the program mode when the
gear selector lever is out of park position P. This
could result in a change of driving characteristics
for which you may not be prepared.
iThe last selected program mode (Cor S) is
switched on when the engine is restarted.
178
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왘Press program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the letter of the
desired program mode appears in the
multifunction display.
Select Cfor comfort driving
(CLS 63 AMG: for standard driving):
앫The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
앫Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
앫Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
Select Sfor standard driving
(CLS 63 AMG: for sporty driving):
앫The vehicle starts out in first gear.
앫Upshifts occur later.
Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting
With the gear selector lever in drive posi-
tion D and driving in program mode C or S,
you can limit or extend the gear range.
If your vehicle is equipped with manual
shift program M, you can use the gear
selector lever to manually shift the gears.
The following instructions describe opera-
tion of the gear selector lever when driving
in the automatic program mode C or S.
Limiting gear range
왘Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the transmis-
sion (컄page 176).
iFor information on using the gear selector
lever in program mode M, see “Manual shift pro-
gram CLS 63 AMG” (컄page 181).
!Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
iTo avoid overrevving the engine when down-
shifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
gear if the engine’s max. speed would be
exceeded.
179
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Extending gear range
왘Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the transmis-
sion.
Canceling gear range limit
왘Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until
D
reappears in
the multifunction display (컄page 173).
The transmission will shift from the
current gear range directly to gear
range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D- direction.
The transmission will automatically
select the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more
gears.
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting*
Steering wheel gearshift control is avail-
able on vehicles with AMG-Sport Package*
and CLS 63 AMG only.
With the gear selector lever in drive
position D and driving in program mode C
or S, you can limit or extend the gear
range.
If your vehicle is equipped with manual
shift program M, you can use the steering
wheel gearshift control to manually shift
the gears.
iIf you press on the accelerator when the en-
gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
iFor information on using the steering wheel
gearshift control in program mode M, see “Man-
ual shift program CLS 63 AMG” (컄page 181).
180
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gearshift paddles (example illustration
vehicles with AMG-Sport Package*)
1Left shift paddle: limiting gear range or
downshift (in program mode M)
2Right shift paddle: extending gear
range or upshift (in program mode M)
The following instructions describe opera-
tion of the steering wheel gearshift control
when driving in the automatic program
mode C or S.
Limiting gear range
왘Briefly pull left shift paddle 1.
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the transmis-
sion (컄page 176).
!Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
iYou cannot shift with the steering wheel
gearshift paddles when the gear selector lever is
in position P,N or R.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
iTo avoid overrevving the engine when down-
shifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
gear if the engine’s max. speed would be
exceeded.
181
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Extending gear range
왘Briefly pull right shift paddle 2.
The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the transmis-
sion.
Canceling gear range limit
왘Pull and hold right shift paddle 2
until
D
reappears in the multifunction
display (컄page 173).
The transmission will shift from the
current gear range directly to gear
range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘Pull and hold left shift paddle 1.
The transmission will automatically
select the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more
gears.
Manual shift program CLS 63 AMG
In addition to the automatic shift
program C or S, your vehicle is equipped
with the manual shift program M.
In the manual program mode M,
system-controlled automatic gearshifting
is switched off and you need to change the
gears by manually upshifting or downshift-
ing using the steering wheel gearshift
paddles (컄page 180) or the gear selector
lever.
iIf you press on the accelerator when the en-
gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
!Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
182
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
The program mode selector switch is
located on the lower part of the center
console.
Program mode selector switch
M Manual For manual gear shifting
C Comfort For standard driving
S Sport For sporty driving
The selected program mode appears in the
multifunction display (컄page 177).
Activating manual shift program
왘Press program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the
M
for manual pro-
gram mode M appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
The transmission switches to the
manual program mode M. Automatic
shifting is switched off. The gear range
is not limited.
You can change the gears manually when
the gear selector lever is in drive
position D. You can upshift or downshift
through the gears in succession.
Upshifting
왘Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
or
왘Briefly pull right shift paddle 2
(컄page 180).
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
If, instead of the manual program mode
symbol
M
, the p symbol appears in the
multifunction display (컄page 177), shift to
the next higher gear. The fuel supply will
otherwise be interrupted to prevent the
engine from overrevving.
iFor information on automatic program
modes C or S, see “Automatic shift program”
(컄page 177), “Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting” (컄page 178), and “Steering wheel
gearshift control one-touch gearshifting*”
(컄page 179).
iThe manual program mode M will not be
stored. When the engine is turned off with the
manual program mode M selected, the transmis-
sion will go to the automatic program mode
(Cor S) when the engine is restarted.
!In the manual program mode M, the trans-
mission will not upshift, even if the engine has
reached its overrevving range. Shift up to the
next gear before the engine has reached its over-
revving range. Make absolutely certain that the
engine speed does not reach the red marking on
the tachometer (컄page 26). Otherwise the
engine could be damaged which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
183
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
If you have selected the AMG menu in the
control system and you are driving in the
manual program mode M, upshift
indicator 2 in the multifunction display
advises you to upshift before the engine
reaches the overspeed range. Thus you
can drive at the maximum engine speed for
each gear without overrevving the engine.
1Gear indicator
2Upshift indicator
왘Shift to the next higher gear.
The fuel supply will otherwise be inter-
rupted to prevent the engine from over-
revving.
Downshifting
왘Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
or
왘Briefly pull left shift paddle 1
(컄page 180).
The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.
Kickdown
Using the kickdown when driving in the
manual program mode M is not possible.
Deactivating manual shift program
왘Press the program mode selector
switch (컄page 182) repeatedly
until
C
or
S
appears in the multifunction
display.
or
왘Restart the engine.
The transmission will go to the
automatic program mode (C or S).
The manual program mode M is not
stored.
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
iWhen you brake or stop, the transmission
shifts down to a gear from which you can easily
accelerate or take off.
184
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less re-
sponsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in limp-home (emergency
operation) mode. In this mode only second
gear and reverse gear can be selected.
왘Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘Move the gear selector lever to park
position P.
왘Turn off the engine.
왘Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.
왘Restart the engine.
왘Move the gear selector lever to
position D (for second gear) or
position R.
왘Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
185
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔Good visibility
For information on windshield wipers, see
“Windshield wipers” (컄page 56).
Headlamp cleaning system*
The button is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
1Headlamp cleaning button
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Press button 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
For more information on filling up the
washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer
system and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄page 292).
Rear view mirrors
For more information on setting the rear
view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄page 46).
Auto-dimming mirrors
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
앫the ignition is switched on
and
앫incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view mir-
ror
The rear view mirrors will not react if
앫reverse gear is engaged
앫the interior lighting is turned on
iThe headlamps will automatically be
cleaned when you have
앫switched on the headlamps
and
앫operated the windshield wipers with wind-
shield washer fluid fifteen times
When you switch off the ignition, the counter re-
sets.
186
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Warning! G
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at the
sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, if the rear window sun-
shade* is in raised position.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic con-
ditions and could cause an accident.
Warning! G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape from the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
!Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can be completely re-
moved only while in the liquid state by applying
plenty of water.
Warning! G
Exercise care when using the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
terior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
187
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passen-
ger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door.
1Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Make sure you have stored a parking
position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄page 127).
왘Vehicles equipped with
Mirror ad-
just. parking aid
in the
Convenience
submenu (컄page 166): Make sure the
Mirror adjust. parking aid
function
in the
Convenience
submenu of the
control system is switched to
On
.
왘Press button 2 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.
왘Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
앫10 seconds after you put the gear
selector lever out of position R
앫immediately once you exceed a vehicle
speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h)
앫immediately when you press button 1
for driver’s side mirror.
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning! G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
188
Controls in detail
Good visibility
1Sun visor
2Mirror cover
3Mirror lamp
4Mounting
5Vanity mirror
왘Swing sun visors 1 down when you
experience glare.
왘To use the vanity mirror 5, lift up the
mirror cover 2.
Make sure the sun visor is properly
engaged in the mounting 4.
Lamp 3 switches on.
If sunlight enters through a side window:
왘Disengage sun visor 1 from
mounting 4.
왘Pivot sun visor to the side.
Rear window sunshade*
The switch is located in the center console.
1Rear window sunshade switch
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Press switch 1 briefly to raise the sun-
shade.
왘Press switch 1 briefly to lower the
sunshade.
Always raise the sunshade fully for its sup-
port against the window frame.
iIf sun visor 1 is disengaged from
mounting 4 with mirror cover 2 open, mirror
lamp 3 will switch off.
Warning! G
When operating the rear window sunshade,
be sure that there is no danger of anyone
being harmed by the raising or lowering pro-
cedure.
The raising or lowering procedure can be
immediately halted by briefly pressing
switch 1. To reverse direction of move-
ment, press switch 1 again.
189
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost-
er as soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically deactivated
after approximately 6 to 20 minutes of
operation depending on the outside tem-
perature.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
Activating
왘Press button F (컄page 193) or
button 1 (컄page 192) on the
respective climate control panel.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘Press button F (컄page 193) or
button 1 (컄page 192) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Warning! G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could re-
sult in an accident and/or serious personal
injury. Warning! G
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driv-
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
!If the rear window defroster switches off too
soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, this
means that too many electrical consumers are
operating simultaneously and there is insuffi-
cient voltage in the battery. The system re-
sponds automatically by deactivating the rear
window defroster.
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
rear window defroster automatically turns itself
back on.
190
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
191
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
1Left side defroster vent, fixed
2Left center air vent, adjustable
3Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
4Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
5Right center air vent, adjustable
6Right side defroster air vent, fixed
7Right side air vent, adjustable
8Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side air vent
9Climate control panel
aThumbwheel for air volume control
for left side air vent
bLeft side air vent, adjustable
iFor draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for the center air vents and side air vents to the
middle position.
192
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
USA only
1Air distribution, driver’s side
2Front window defroster
3Temperature rocker switch, driver’s
side
4Display
5Temperature rocker switch,
passenger side
6Rear window defroster
7Air distribution, passenger side
8Air distribution and air volume, pas-
senger side (automatic, manual)
9AC cooling on/off
aRear air-conditioning remote control
bIncreasing air volume
cClimate control on/off
dDecreasing air volume
eMAX COOL on/off
fAir recirculation
gAir distribution and air volume, driv-
er’s side (automatic, manual)
193
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
1Air distribution, driver’s side
2Front window defroster
3Temperature rocker switch, driver’s
side
4Display
5Temperature rocker switch,
passenger side
6Rear window defroster
7Air distribution, passenger side
8Air distribution and air volume, pas-
senger side (automatic, manual)
9AC cooling on/off
aRear air-conditioning remote control
bIncreasing air volume
cClimate control on/off
dDecreasing air volume
eResidual heat/ventilation
fAir recirculation
gAir distribution and air volume, driv-
er’s side (automatic, manual)
194
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
The climate control is a 4-zone intelligent
climate control system. Your vehicle interi-
or is divided into 4 zones.
With the help of a sun sensor, the climate
control determines the relation of the sun
to the vehicle and automatically adjusts
the inside temperature for every individual
zone.
You can set the temperature for each of
the 4 zones separately.
The climate control is operational whenev-
er the engine is running. It cools the vehi-
cle’s interior according to the angle and
intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside tem-
perature and the selected temperature.
You can operate the climate control sys-
tem in either the automatic or manual
mode.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode (컄page 203) is
deactivated.
Warning! G
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature).
This may cause burn or frostbite to unpro-
tected skin in the immediate area of the air
vents. Always keep sufficient distance be-
tween unprotected parts of the body and the
air vents. If necessary, use the air distribu-
tion controls (컄page 192) or (컄page 193)
to direct the air to air vents in the vehicle in-
terior that are not in the immediate area of
unprotected skin.
195
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Deactivating the climate control
system
Deactivating
왘Press button ´ (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193) until the display 4
(컄page 192) or (컄page 193) is
cleared.
Reactivating
왘Make sure the ignition is switched on.
왘Press button ´ (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193) again.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
Warning! G
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
iSevere conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before its
scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
the air volume to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-
ture” (컄page 210). The climate control will then
adjust the interior temperature to the set value
much faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
shield free of snow and debris.
Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the
air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear
window.
Warning! G
When the climate control is switched off, the
outside air supply and circulation are also
switched off. Only choose this setting for a
short time. Otherwise the windows could
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering
you and others.
iTo switch the system on, you can also press
another button, with the exception of 1 or
F and T (컄page 192) or (컄page 193).
196
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Operating the climate control system
in automatic mode
Activating
왘Press one button U (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193) while the engine is run-
ning.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
AUTO
appears in the
display 4 (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193). The air volume and air
distribution are adjusted automatically.
왘Use temperature rocker switches 3
and 5 (컄page 192) or (컄page 193)
to separately adjust the air tempera-
ture on each side of the passenger
compartment.
The temperature of the vehicle interior
is adjusted automatically.
Deactivating
왘Press button or Q
(컄page 192) or (컄page 193).
The
AUTO
indicator in the display 4
(컄page 192) or (컄page 193) goes
out. The automatic function for air vol-
ume is switched off, and air volume is
controlled according to the desired set-
ting.
or
왘Turn air distribution controls 1
and 7 (컄page 192) or (컄page 193)
on each side of the passenger compart-
ment to the desired symbol.
The indicator lamp on the correspond-
ing button goes out. Automatic air dis-
tribution is switched off in the
corresponding zone, and air distribu-
tion is controlled according to the de-
sired position.
The automatic air volume remains
switched on.
iWhen operating the climate control system
in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to
adjust the temperature, air volume and air distri-
bution.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is
switched on. This function can be switched off.
Warning! G
If you switch off the cooling function the
windows can fog up more quickly. Window
fogging may impair visibility and endanger
you and others.
iYou can switch the automatic climate con-
trol system on and off for each side of the pas-
senger compartment as desired.
197
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Setting the temperature
Use temperature control rocker
switches 3 and 5 (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small incre-
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
The adjusted temperature appears in the
display 4 (컄page 192) or (컄page 193).
The climate control will adjust to the set
temperature as fast as possible.
Increasing
왘Push top of temperature control rocker
switch 3 and/or 5 (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193).
The climate control system will corre-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
Decreasing
왘Push bottom of temperature control
rocker switch 3 and/or 5
(컄page 192) or (컄page 193).
The climate control system will corre-
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
perature.
Adjusting air distribution
Use the air distribution controls 1 and 7
(컄page 193) or (컄page 192) to separate-
ly adjust the air distribution on each side of
the passenger compartment.
The following symbols are located on the
controls:
iYou can also adjust the temperature in the
rear passenger compartment (컄page 204).
iWhen operating the climate control system
in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to
adjust the temperature, air volume and air distri-
bution.
Symbol Function
aDirects air through the center,
side and rear passenger com-
partment air vents
ZDirects air to the windshield
and through the side air vents
XDirects air into the entire vehi-
cle interior
YDirects air to the footwells
198
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
왘Turn air distribution controls 1
and 7 (컄page 193) or (컄page 192)
on each side of the passenger compart-
ment to the desired symbol.
The indicator lamp on the correspond-
ing button goes out and the automatic
air distribution is switched off for the
corresponding side. The air distribution
is controlled according to the thumb-
wheel setting.
Opening the center air vents
왘Turn thumbwheels 3 and 4
(컄page 190) upward.
The side air vents 2 and 5 are open.
Closing the center air vents
왘Turn thumbwheels 3 and 4
(컄page 190) downward.
The side air vents 2 and 5 are
closed.
Opening and closing side air vents
왘Turn thumbwheels 8 and a
(컄page 190) in the required direction.
The side air vents 7 and b are open
or closed.
Adjusting air volume
Use buttons U (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193) for automatic mode or air
volume buttons or Q
(컄page 192) or (컄page 193) to adjust air
volume manually.
Nine blower speeds are available.
왘Press button to decrease or
button Q to increase air volume to
the desired level.
The
AUTO
indicator for air volume in the
display 4 goes out (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193). The selected blower
speed is shown in the display 4. Auto-
matic air distribution remains switched
on.
The indicator lamps on the U but-
tons remain lit.
iYou can also turn the air distribution control
to a position between two symbols.
199
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Front defroster
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
Activating
왘Press button P or 0
(컄page 192) or (컄page 193).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. Display 4 (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193) is cleared.
The air conditioning switches
automatically to the following functions:
앫cooling on to dehumidify
앫maximum blowing and heating
power (depends on cooling
temperature)
앫air flows onto the windshield and
the front side windows
앫the air recirculation mode is
switched off
Deactivating
왘Press button P or 0
(컄page 192) or (컄page 193) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘Switch windshield wipers on
(컄page 57).
왘Press button U (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193).
If the automatic mode of the climate con-
trol is switched off:
왘Turn air distribution control 1 and 7
to a or Y (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193).
iKeep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear again.
iIf you have switched on the defrost function
using the 0 button, you cannot make any
other settings.
iThe cooling remains switched on.
iKeep this setting selected only until the
windshield is clear again.
200
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Maximum cooling MAX COOL
(USA only)
You can use this setting to provide the fast-
est possible cooling of the vehicle interior
(when windows and tilt/sliding sunroof or
tilt/sliding panel* are closed).
Activating
왘Press button e (컄page 192).
MAX COOL
appears in the display 4
(컄page 192).
The air conditioning switches
automatically to the following functions:
앫maximum cooling
앫maximum blowing power
앫the air recirculation mode is
switched on
Deactivating
왘Press button e (컄page 192) again.
MAX COOL
disappears in the display 4
(컄page 192).
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e.g. before driving
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
iTo switch the maximum cooling function off,
you can also press button ´, U, 0 or
1 (컄page 192). Warning! G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger-
ing you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄page 203) is activated, or
press button 0 or 0.
201
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Activating
왘Press button , (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘Press button , (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Air recirculation mode with conve-
nience closing or opening feature
iThe air recirculation mode is activated auto-
matically at high outside temperatures and if the
concentration of carbon monoxide (CO) and ni-
trogen oxide in the outside air increases, for ex-
ample in a tunnel.
The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when
the air recirculation mode is automatically
switched on.
A quantity of outside air is added after approxi-
mately 30 minutes.
iThe air recirculation mode is deactivated au-
tomatically:
앫after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
below approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
turned off
앫after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
Warning! G
Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding
sunroof or tilt/sliding panel* if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
opening or closing procedure.
In the event that the procedure causes po-
tential danger, the closing of the windows
can be immediately halted by pressing or
pulling the respective window switch. The
closing of the tilt/sliding sunroof can be im-
mediately halted by moving the switch for
the tilt/sliding sunroof in any direction.
The closing of the windows and the tilt/slid-
ing sunroof can be reversed by again press-
ing and holding the , button.
202
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Convenience closing
왘Press button , (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193) for approximately
2 seconds.
The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
will close. You can release button ,
once the closing procedure has begun.
The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
continue closing until they are fully
closed. The indicator lamp on the but-
ton comes on. The air recirculation
mode is activated.
Convenience opening
왘Press button , for approximately
2 seconds.
The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof
will return to their previous position.
You can release button, once the open-
ing procedure has begun. The windows
and tilt/sliding sunroof continue open-
ing until they have reached their previ-
ous position. The indicator lamp on the
button goes out. The air recirculation
mode is deactivated.
Combination filter with
pollutant-sensitive air-recirculation
mode
The combination filter reduces pollutants
and unpleasant odors in the outside air.
The pollutant-sensitive air-recirculation
mode automatically switches off the
supply of outside air when pollutants are
detected in the air.
iA window or tilt/sliding sunroof will only re-
turn to its previous position if it has not been
moved to another position using the respective
window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof switch af-
ter it was closed with button ,.
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof that has been
moved will remain in its current position if
button , is used to re-open the remaining
windows or tilt/sliding sunroof.
iThe pollutant-sensitive air-recirculation
mode is not possible if you have switched off the
air conditioning or if the temperature falls below
41°F (5°C).
203
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Air conditioning
The cooling function, only operational
when the engine is running, cools the vehi-
cle interior down to the selected tempera-
ture. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
thus preventing the windows from fogging
up.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
tioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘Press button 2 (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
ing.
왘Press button 2 (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193) again.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
Residual heat and ventilation
(Canada only)
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
iCondensation may drip out from underneath
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction.
Warning! G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
!If the air conditioning cannot be turned on
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned it-
self off.
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
iIf you switch on the residual heat function
when temperatures are high, only the ventilation
will be switched on.
iRegardless of the selected air volume, the
blower operates at low speed.
204
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Activating
왘Switch off the ignition.
왘Press button T (컄page 193).
REST
in the display 4 (컄page 193)
comes on.
Deactivating
왘Press button T (컄page 193) again.
REST
in the display 4 (컄page 193)
goes out.
Rear climate control
The rear climate control is adjusted via the
front climate control panel (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193) or the rear climate control
panel.
The rear climate control panel is located in
the rear center console.
iHow long the system will provide heating de-
pends on
앫the coolant temperature
앫the temperature set by the operator
The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless
of the air distribution control setting.
iThe residual heat is automatically turned off:
앫when the ignition is switched on
앫after about 30 minutes
앫if the battery voltage drops
앫if the coolant temperature is too low
1Left rear center air vent, adjustable
2Right rear center air vent, adjustable
3Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right rear center air vent
4Temperature rocker switch, right
5Display
6Temperature rocker switch, left
7Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left rear center air vent
205
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Setting the temperature
Use temperature control rocker
switches 4 and 6 to separately adjust
the air temperature on each side of the
rear passenger compartment.
You should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C). The adjusted tem-
perature appears in the display 5. The
rear climate control will adjust to the set
temperature as fast as possible.
1Temperature, left
2Temperature, right
왘Adjust the temperature to the desired
setting for each side of the passenger
compartment using the left and right
temperature buttons.
The temperature in the rear passenger
compartment is adjusted automatical-
ly.
Adjusting air distribution
왘Move the slider for the left center
vent 1 or right center vent 2 to the
left, right, up, or down.
The air flow is directed in the
corresponding direction.
Adjusting air volume
왘Turn thumbwheel 3 or 7
(컄page 204) up or down.
The air volume is increased or
decreased.
iYou can also adjust the rear temperature us-
ing the front climate control panel (컄page 192)
or (컄page 193).
iThe rear climate control will not cool the air
when the air conditioning is switched off
(컄page 203).
iFor draft-free ventilation, push slides 1
and 2 (컄page 204) upward.
206
Controls in detail
4-zone automatic climate control
Adjusting the rear settings with the
front control panel
You can adjust the temperature for the
rear climate control from the front climate
control panel.
왘Press button ™ or 5
(컄page 192) or (컄page 193).
The display switches over.
1Rear climate control display
왘Set the desired temperature for the
rear passenger compartment using
temperature rocker switches 4
and 6 (컄page 204).
After approximately 5 seconds after
the last adjustment, the display switch-
es back to its standard display.
Front center console storage compart-
ment ventilation
The front center console storage compart-
ment under the armrest has its own air
vent. The air temperature is about the
same as that of the dashboard air vents.
The lever is located in the front center
vent.
1Lever
왘To open air vent slide the lever 1 up.
왘To close air vent slide the lever 1
down.
iYou can also press button ™ or 5
(컄page 192) or (컄page 193) once more to
switch back to the standard display.
iThe compartment can get very warm due to
its confined space. When storing heat sensitive
objects (e.g. groceries) in the compartment,
close the air vent while heating the passenger
compartment.
207
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
The side windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all of the side
windows are on the driver’s door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the front passenger door and the rear
doors.
1Rear window override switch
(컄page 89)
2Right front window
3Right rear window
4Left rear window
5Left front window
Warning! G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The closing of the door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch
or, if switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
The door windows are equipped with the
express-close and automatic reversal func-
tion. If the window encounters an obstruc-
tion that blocks its path in a circumstance
where you pulled the switch past the resis-
tance point and released it to close the win-
dow, the automatic reversal function will
stop the window and open it slightly.
If the window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the window by pulling and
holding the switch, by pressing and holding
button ‹ on the SmartKey, by pressing
and holding the lock button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*) on an outside door handle,
the automatic reversal function will not op-
erate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised ac-
cess to a vehicle could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
208
Controls in detail
Power windows
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
Opening the windows
왘Press switch 2 to 5 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
Closing the windows
왘Pull switch 2 to 5 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
iYou can also open or close the windows us-
ing the SmartKey, see “Summer opening fea-
ture” (컄page 210) and “Convenience closing
feature” (컄page 210).
Depending on current position, the windows may
also open or close when the air recirculation
button , in the automatic climate control
(컄page 193) or (컄page 192) is pressed and
held.
iOperating the windows from the rear is not
possible if you activate the override switch
(컄page 89).
iWith the SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or removed from the starter switch,
the power windows can be operated:
앫until you open the driver’s or front passen-
ger’s door
앫for at least 5 minutes if no door was opened
Warning! G
If you pull and hold the switch up when clos-
ing the window, and upward movement of
the window is blocked by some obstruction
including but not limited to arms, hands, fin-
gers, etc., the automatic reversal will not op-
erate.
209
Controls in detail
Power windows
Fully opening the windows
(Express-open)
왘Press switch 2 to 5 past the resis-
tance point and release.
The corresponding window opens com-
pletely.
Fully closing the windows
(Express-close)
왘Pull switch 2 to 5 past the resis-
tance point and release.
The corresponding window closes com-
pletely.
Stopping windows during Express-op-
eration
왘Press or pull the respective power win-
dow switch again.
Synchronizing power windows
The power windows must be synchronized
앫after the battery has been disconnect-
ed
앫if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close)
Synchronizing
왘Close all doors.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Pull switch 2 to 5 until the side win-
dows are completely closed.
왘Hold on to switches 2 to 5 for
approximately 1 second.
The power windows are synchronized.
Warning! G
Driver’s door only:
If within 5 seconds switch is again pulled
past the resistance point and released, the
automatic reversal will not operate.
!If the upward movement of the window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the win-
dow will stop and open slightly.
Remove the obstruction, pull the respective pow-
er window switch again past the resistance point
and release.
If the window still does not close when there is
no obstruction, pull and hold the respective pow-
er window switch. The side window will then
close without the obstruction sensor function.
210
Controls in detail
Power windows
Summer opening feature
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simulta-
neously:
앫opening the side windows
앫opening the tilt/sliding sunroof
앫turning on the seat ventilation* for the
driver’s seat
SmartKey
왘Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle. The
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim-
ity to the driver’s outside door handle.
왘Press and hold button Œ until the
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof
have reached the desired position.
왘Release button Œ to interrupt pro-
cedure.
Convenience closing feature
When you lock the vehicle, you can close
the windows, tilt/sliding sunroof simulta-
neously.
왘Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
the driver’s outside door handle
(컄page 210). The SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
in close proximity to the driver’s out-
side door handle.
왘Press and hold button ‹ until the
windows, the tilt/sliding sunroof are
completely closed.
iThe seat ventilation* for the driver’s seat is
automatically set to the highest level if activated
via summer opening feature.
211
Controls in detail
Power windows
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
1Lock button
왘Press and hold the lock button 1 at an
outside door handle until the windows,
the tilt/sliding sunroof are completely
closed.
왘Release the lock button 1 at the out-
side door handle to interrupt proce-
dure.
Warning! G
When closing the windows and the tilt/slid-
ing sunroof, make sure that there is no dan-
ger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
lows:
앫Release button ‹ to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold
button Œ. To continue the closing
procedure after making sure that there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure, press and hold
button ‹.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫Release the lock button (컄page 62) on
the exterior driver’s door handle to stop
the closing procedure.
앫Pull on the exterior driver’s door handle
and hold firmly. The side windows and
the tilt/sliding sunroof will open for as
long as the door handle is held but the
door not opened.
212
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened and
closed electrically. The switch for the
tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead
control panel.
Sunroof switch
1Push back to slide sunroof open
2Push forward to slide sunroof closed
3Push up to raise sunroof at rear
4Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the sunroof opening
to guard against sun rays. When sliding the
sunroof open, the screen will also retract.
Warning! G
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt-
ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch
was moved past the resistance point and
released, by moving the switch in any direc-
tion.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury
for occupants wearing their seat belts prop-
erly as entire body parts or portions of them
may protrude from the passenger compart-
ment.
213
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof
왘To open, close, raise or lower the
tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
switch to resistance point in the re-
quired direction of arrows 1to 4.
Release the sunroof switch when the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could re-
sult in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
!To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans-
port any objects with sharp edges which can
stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in
malfunctions.
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed
manually should an electrical malfunction occur
(컄page 400).
!Please keep in mind that weather conditions
can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to
close the tilt/sliding sunroof when leaving the
vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehi-
cle electronics could be damaged which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
iWhen the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, reso-
nance noises may result in addition to the usual
wind noises. They are caused by minimal pres-
sure changes in the passenger compartment. To
reduce or eliminate these noises, change the po-
sition of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side
window slightly.
iYou can also open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof using the SmartKey (summer open-
ing/convenience closing feature) (컄page 210).
Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding
sunroof may also open or close when the air re-
circulation button , in the automatic climate
control (컄page 193) or (컄page 192) is pressed
and held.
214
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Fully opening (Express-open) and clos-
ing (Express-close) the power tilt/slid-
ing sunroof
왘To open or close the tilt/sliding sun-
roof, move the sunroof switch past the
resistance point in the direction of
arrow 1to 2 and release.
The tilt/pop up roof opens or closes
completely.
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
during Express-operation
왘Move the sunroof switch in any direc-
tion.
Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding
sunroof
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchro-
nized
앫after the battery has been
disconnected or discharged
앫after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
closed manually (컄page 400)
앫after a malfunction
앫if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
smoothly
왘Remove the respective fuse from the
main fuse box (컄page 428).
왘Reinsert the fuse in the main fuse box.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Move and hold the sunroof switch in
the direction of arrow 3 until the
tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
rear.
Keep holding the sunroof switch in the
direction of arrow 3 for approximately
1 second.
왘Check the Express-open feature
(컄page 214).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens com-
pletely, the roof is synchronized. Other-
wise repeat the above steps.
iIf the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.
215
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔Driving systems
The following driving systems are
explained on the following pages:
앫Cruise control and Distronic*, with
which the vehicle can maintain a preset
speed
앫Airmatic DC adjusts the vehicle sus-
pension characteristics automatically
and controls the vehicle level
앫Parktronic system*, which assists the
driver during parking maneuvers
For information on the BAS, ABS, ESP® and
EBP, see “Driving safety systems”
(컄page 91).
Cruise control
The cruise control automatically maintains
the speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column (컄page 24).
Warning! G
The cruise control is a convenience system
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road,
traffic, and weather conditions make it ad-
visable to travel at a steady speed.
앫The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫The use of cruise control can be danger-
ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫Deactivate the cruise control when driv-
ing in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
216
Controls in detail
Driving systems
1Set current or higher speed
2Set current or lower speed
3Cancel cruise control
4Resume at last set speed
Setting current speed
왘Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
The selected speed appears in the multi-
function display for approximately
5 seconds, and the corresponding speed-
ometer segments from the selected speed
to the vehicle maximum speed are illumi-
nated.
Warning! G
The cruise control brakes automatically so
that the set speed is not exceeded.
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a con-
venience system designed to assist the driv-
er during vehicle operation. The driver is and
must always remain responsible for the ve-
hicle’s speed and for safe brake operation.
iOn uphill or downhill grades, the cruise con-
trol may not be able to maintain the set speed.
Once the grade eases, the set speed will be re-
sumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains
the set speed with active braking action. In addi-
tion, on longer downhill grades the automatic
transmission will automatically downshift.
217
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel the cruise
control:
왘Step on the brake pedal.
The cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
or
왘Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3 (컄page 216).
The cruise control is canceled. The last
speed set is stored for later use.
Setting a higher speed
왘Lift the cruise control lever in direction
of arrow 1 (컄page 216) and hold it
up until the desired speed is reached.
왘Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
Setting a lower speed
왘Depress the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 2 (컄page 216) and
hold it down until the desired speed is
reached.
왘Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
iThe last stored speed is canceled when you
turn off the engine.
iThe cruise control automatically switches
off, if
앫you step on the brake pedal.
앫you depress the parking brake pedal.
In this case the segments in the multifunc-
tion display (컄page 141) go out and no
warning sounds.
앫the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h).
앫the ESP® is in operation or switched off with
the ESP® switch (컄page 96).
앫you move the gear selector lever to position
N while driving.
The segments in the multifunction display
(컄page 141) go out, and an acoustic warning
sounds.
!Moving the gear selector lever to position N
while driving also cancels the cruise control.
However, the gear selector lever should not be
moved to position N while driving except to
coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding
(e.g. on icy roads).
iDepressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceler-
ation (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will re-
sume the last speed set.
iWhen you use the cruise control lever to de-
celerate, the brake system will automatically
brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
218
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 (컄page 216).
Slower
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 2 (컄page 216).
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
왘Briefly pull the cruise control lever to
position 4 (컄page 216).
The cruise control resume the last set
speed.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The selected speed appears in the multi-
function display for approximately
5 seconds, and the corresponding speed-
ometer segments from the selected speed
to the vehicle maximum speed are illumi-
nated.
Distronic*
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases driving
convenience afforded by the cruise control
during travel on expressways and other
major roads.
앫If the Distronic distance sensor detects
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so
that you follow that vehicle at a preset
distance.
앫If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, Distronic will function in the same
way as cruise control (컄page 216).
Warning! G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to the pre-
set speed could cause an accident and/or
serious injury to you and others.
Warning! G
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no sub-
stitute for active driving involvement. It does
not react to stationary objects, nor recog-
nize or predict the curvature and lane layout
or the movement of vehicles ahead.
Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20%
of the vehicle’s braking power.
219
Controls in detail
Driving systems
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to road, traffic, and weather
conditions and to provide the steering, brak-
ing and other driving inputs necessary to re-
tain control of the vehicle.
Warning! G
Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed
adjustment reduction capability is intended
to make cruise control more effective and
usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not
however, intended to, nor does it, replace
the need for extreme care. The responsibili-
ty for the vehicle speed and the distance to
the vehicle ahead, including most impor-
tantly brake operation to assure safe stop-
ping distance, always rests with the driver.
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
ditions into account.
Warning! G
Distronic requires familiarity with its opera-
tional characteristics. We strongly recom-
mend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
iUSA only: This device has been approved by
the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The ra-
dar sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or alter-
ing of the device will void any warranties, and is
not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with,
alter, or use in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
iCanada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will
void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not
tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
220
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning! G
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
ditions into account. Only use Distronic if
the road, weather and traffic conditions
make it advisable to travel at a steady
speed.
Warning! G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip-
pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic
during conditions of fog and heavy rain,
snow or sleet.
Warning! G
Distronic cannot take weather conditions
into account. Switch off Distronic or do not
turn it on if:
앫roads are slippery or covered with snow
or ice. The wheels could lose traction
while braking or accelerating, and the
vehicle could skid
앫the sensor is dirty or visibility is
diminished due to snow, rain or fog. The
distance control could be impaired
Always pay attention to traffic conditions
even while Distronic is switched on. Other-
wise, you may not be able to recognize
dangerous situations until it is too late and
could cause an accident resulting in person-
al or fatal injury to you or others.
Warning! G
Close attention to road and traffic condi-
tions is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not Distronic is activated.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind-
ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi-
tions do not allow safe driving at a steady
speed.
Distronic will not react to stationary objects
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
Switch off Distronic:
앫when changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
앫when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
221
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic displays in the speedometer
dial
1Set speed
If Distronic is activated, one or two seg-
ments come on around the set speed.
1Segments
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the segments (representing the
difference) from the speed of the vehicle
ahead to the set speed come on.
If Distronic calculates that there is a dan-
ger of collision:
앫The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on red.
앫An intermittent warning sounds.
Distronic is designed and intended only to
maintain a set speed and keep a set dis-
tance from moving objects in front of it.
Warning! G
The “Resume” function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
iThe vehicle speed displayed on the speed-
ometer can briefly vary from the speed setting
on the Distronic system.
222
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘Immediately brake the vehicle to avoid
a collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the follow-
ing warning note.
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the red distance warning
lamp l goes out when the neces-
sary distance to the vehicle ahead is
again established.
Warning! G
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp l in the instru-
ment cluster is illuminated if the Distronic
system calculates that the distance to the
vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current
speed indicate that Distronic will not be ca-
pable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to
maintain the preset following distance,
which creates a danger of a collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
the distance to the vehicle in front of you.
The warning sound is intended as a final cau-
tion that you have not interceded with your
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the op-
eration of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking, as that will result in
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact
being avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
Warning! G
Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi-
mum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2).
This corresponds to about 20% of the maxi-
mum deceleration ability of your vehicle.
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
restore the preset distance or to maintain
the speed.
223
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic menu in the control system
In the Distronic menu you can read the cur-
rent settings for Distronic. What appears in
the multifunction display depends on
whether Distronic and the distance warn-
ing function are turned on or off.
왘Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until one of the following displays ap-
pears.
Distronic deactivated
When Distronic is deactivated you will see
the standard display in the multifunction
display.
1Vehicle ahead, if detected
2Actual distance to vehicle ahead
3Preset distance threshold to vehicle
ahead
4Your vehicle
5Symbol for activated distance warning
function
Distronic activated
If you turn Distronic on, you will see the set
speed in the multifunction display for
about 5 seconds. When Distronic is
activated, you will see the following display
in the multifunction display.
1Distronic activated
224
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Cruise control lever
The Distronic system is operated by means
of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column.
1Set current or higher speed
2Set current or lower speed
3Deactivate Distronic
4Resume at last set speed
Activating Distronic
You can activate Distronic if:
앫you are driving between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h)
앫the ESP® is activated (컄page 94)
If Distronic has not been activated after
pressing the cruise control lever you will
see the message
---
in the multifunction
display.
In the following cases you cannot activate
Distronic:
앫up to 2 minutes after starting the
engine
앫when you brake
앫if you have set the parking brake
앫if the gear selector lever is in
position P, R or N
앫if the ESP® is switched off
Setting the current speed
왘Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘Briefly lift or depress the cruise control
lever.
Distronic is activated and the current
speed is set.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
iIf you do not take your foot off the
accelerator completely, the following message
will appear in the multifunction display:
DISTRONIC override
.
The distance to a slower moving vehicles in front
of you will not be set. Your vehicle speed will
then be determined only by the accelerator ped-
al position.
225
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1 (컄page 224) to
increase vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds (컄page 223), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
come on, on the speedometer
(컄page 221).
Setting a lower speed
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2 (컄page 224) to
decrease vehicle speed in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
The new speed is set.
The stored speed is displayed in the
multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds (컄page 223), and one or
two segments around the stored speed
come on, on the speedometer
(컄page 221).
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Faster
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄page 224).
iDepressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration
(e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume
the last speed set.
iWhen you use the cruise control lever to de-
celerate, the brakes will be applied to support
deceleration.
In addition, the transmission will automatically
downshift on long downhill grades.
226
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting stored speed
(“Resume” function)
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 4 (컄page 224).
Distronic is activated and set to the last
stored speed.
왘Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Deactivating Distronic
There are several ways to deactivate the
Distronic system:
왘Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 3 (컄page 224).
or
왘Step on the brake pedal.
Distronic will be deactivated. The last
speed set will be stored in memory.
Distronic deactivates automatically when:
앫you set the parking brake
앫you drive slower than 20 mph
(30 km/h)
앫the ESP® is active (컄page 94) or you
deactivate the ESP®
앫you move the gear selector lever into
position N
A signal will sound. The
DISTRONIC Off
message appears in the multifunction
display for approximately 5 seconds.
Warning! G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions per-
mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to the pre-
set speed could cause an accident and/or
serious injury to you and others.
iThe following message will appear in the
multifunction display for approximately
5seconds:
DISTRONIC Off
.
The last stored speed is deleted when you turn
off the engine.
Warning! G
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) by operation of the
system. At that time the driver must apply
the brakes in order to reduce vehicle speed
further or bring it to a stop.
227
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You can set the specified following dis-
tance for Distronic by varying the time set-
ting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
this time setting and the current speed of
your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
the required following distance to the vehi-
cle ahead. The set distance will be shown
in the multifunction display field.
The thumbwheel for making the time set-
ting is located on the lower section of the
center console.
1Distance warning function on/off
switch
2Indicator lamp
3Thumbwheel for setting distance
Increasing distance
Increasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a greater following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ¯.
Decreasing distance
Decreasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the vehicle ahead.
왘Turn thumbwheel 3 towards ®.
Distance warning function
When Distronic is deactivated, this func-
tion will continue to warn you when recog-
nizing a stationary obstacle or a slower
vehicle moving in the vehicle’s path and
the danger of a collision exists:
앫The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on.
앫An intermittent warning will sound if
necessary.
If these warnings are issued, you must
brake manually to maintain a safe distance
and avoid a collision with the vehicle
ahead.
Warning! G
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recom-
mendations for safe following distance.
228
Controls in detail
Driving systems
When pressing the brake pedal, the warn-
ing sound ceases. The warning sound will
also cease when the distance to the vehi-
cle ahead is sufficient again without apply-
ing the brakes. In this case, the distance
warning lamp also go out.
Activating
왘Press switch 1.
The indicator lamp 2 on the switch
comes on. A loudspeaker symbol
appears in the multifunction display
(컄page 223).
Deactivating
왘Press switch 1.
The indicator lamp 2 on the switch
goes out. No loudspeaker symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
Driving with Distronic
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is
required on the part of the driver. Be pre-
pared to brake in such situations. This will
deactivate the Distronic system.
Warning! G
If the distance warning lamp l in the in-
strument cluster comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, im-
mediate attention on the part of the driver is
required. As required by the traffic situation,
apply the brakes and navigate around a pos-
sible obstacle. However, do not drive by
relying on the distance warning function, as
this will result in an emergency braking
application. Especially depending on road
surface conditions and driver reaction, this
will not always enable you to avoid a colli-
sion.
iComplex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by Distronic. This could result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Warning! G
Distronic works to maintain the speed se-
lected by the driver unless a moving obsta-
cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-
lowing another vehicle ahead of you at a dis-
tance set by Distronic). This means that:
앫Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you change lanes.
앫While in a sharp turn or if the vehicle in
front is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of a vehicle traveling in front
of it, then your vehicle could accelerate
to the previously selected speed.
229
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case,
Distronic will switch off, and the message
DISTRONIC
currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
appears in the multifunction display.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
sor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system
sensor cover” (컄page 336).
Turns and bends
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.
Distronic regulates only the distance be-
tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
of it, but does not register stationary objects
in the road, e.g.:
앫a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
앫a disabled vehicle
앫an oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be on the alert,
observe all traffic and intercede as required
by steering or braking the vehicle.
Warning! G
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
road conditions.
iIf the message
DISTRONIC
currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
disappears during driving and the last speed
stored flashes for approximately 5 seconds, the
dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved; Distronic works
again.
230
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi-
cient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane changing
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Narrow vehicles
Because of their narrow profile, the vehi-
cles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane have not yet been detected by
Distronic. There will be insufficient dis-
tance to the vehicles ahead.
231
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Airmatic DC (Dual Control)
Airmatic automatically selects the opti-
mum suspension tuning and ride height for
your vehicle. The Airmatic consists of two
components:
앫Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
앫Vehicle level control
The ADS automatically selects the opti-
mum damping for the respective driving
conditions. At the same time the suspen-
sion is set to either Sport 1, Sport 2 or
Comfort.
Suspension tuning
The suspension tuning is set according to:
앫Your driving style
앫Road surface conditions
앫Your choice of suspension style,
Sport 1, Sport 2 or Comfort, which you
select using the damping button
The following suspension styles are avail-
able:
앫Comfort
Both indicator lamps 2 are off.
앫Sport 1
One indicator lamp 2 is on.
앫Sport 2
Both indicator lamps 2 are on.
1Damping button
2Indicator lamps
왘Start the engine (컄page 51).
왘Press the damping button 1 until the
desired suspension style is set.
!If you have selected the Comfort suspen-
sion tuning (컄page 231), the vehicle lowers
slightly when you lock it within approximately
60 seconds after switching off the engine. When
parking, make sure that your vehicle cannot
come into contact with other objects, such as a
curb, while lowering. Your vehicle could
otherwise be damaged.
iThe selected suspension style is stored in
memory, even after the SmartKey is removed
from the starter switch.
232
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicle level control
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to
앫increase vehicle safety
앫reduce fuel consumption
The following vehicle chassis ride heights
can be selected:
앫Normal
앫Raised
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level
setting and to the vehicle speed:
앫At a speed exceeding approximately
68 mph (110 km/h) with normal level
set or exceeding 75 mph (120 km/h)
with raised level set, the ride height is
reduced automatically. The table on
the next page provides an overview of
the vehicle levels.
앫With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the normal level.
Select the raised level only when required
by current driving conditions. Otherwise
앫handling may be impaired
앫fuel consumption may increase
iThese height adjustments are so small that
you may not notice any change.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when low-
ering the vehicle chassis.
233
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary and
the engine is running:
Vehicle level
when stationary
Indicator lamp
(컄page 234)
Suspension
tuning
Use for Ride height increase
over normal
Automatic lowering
Normal Lamp off Comfort For driving on normal
roads
None Max. approx. 0.4 in (10 mm)
Normal Lamp off Sport 1 or 2 For driving on normal
roads
None Max. approx. 0.6 in (15 mm)
Raised Lamp on Comfort For driving on rough
roads or with snow
chains
Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.2 in (30 mm)
Raised Lamp on Sport 1 or 2 For driving on rough
roads or with snow
chains
Approx. 0.8 in (20 mm) Max. approx. 1.4 in (35 mm)
234
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The button is located in the lower section
of the center console.
1Vehicle level control button
2Indicator lamp
왘Start the engine (컄page 51).
왘Briefly press button 1 to change from
normal level to raised level. When vehi-
cle is at raised level, pressing the but-
ton will return the vehicle to normal
level.
When raised level is set, indicator
lamp 2 in the button comes on.
When normal level is set, indicator
lamp 2 in the button goes out.
iAt a speed of approximately above 75 mph
(120 km/h) or if the speed amounts to between
50 mph (80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for
approximately five minutes, the setting raised is
canceled. The indicator lamp 2 in the button
goes out.
If you do not drive in this speed range, the raised
level remains stored even if the SmartKey is re-
moved from the starter switch.
235
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic system (Parking assist)*
The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
designed to assist the driver during park-
ing maneuvers. It visually and audibly indi-
cates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically
activated when you switch on the ignition,
release the parking brake, and placed the
gear selector lever in position D,R,orN.
The Parktronic system deactivates at
speeds over approximately 11 mph
(18 km/h). At lower speeds the Parktronic
system turns on again.
The Parktronic system also deactivates
when you place the gear selector lever in
position P or depress the parking brake
pedal.
The Parktronic system monitors the sur-
roundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper.
1Sensors in the front bumper
Range of the sensors
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to
scratch or damage the sensors, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors”
(컄page 336).
Warning! G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by
the system and can damage the vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
system can be affected by dirty sensors,
especially at times of snow and ice, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors”
(컄page 336).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig-
nals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash or
the air brakes of trucks) can cause the sys-
tem to send erratic indications, and should
be taken into consideration.
Warning! G
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
236
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Front sensors
Rear sensors
Minimum distance
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the distance warning segments
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If
the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance might no
longer be indicated by the system.
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
!During parking maneuvers, pay special at-
tention to objects located above or below the
height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer
hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect
such objects at close range and damage to your
vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g.
truck air brakes, car wash or jackhammers) may
impair the operation of the Parktronic system.
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
237
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
ative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle. The warning indicator for the
front area is located above the center air
vents in the dashboard. The warning indi-
cator for the rear area is integrated in the
rear trim.
Front area warning indicator
1Left side of the vehicle
2Right side of the vehicle
3Readiness indicators
Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red segments for either
side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system
is operational when the yellow readiness
indicators 3 are illuminated.
The position of the gear selector lever
determines which warning indicators will
be activated.
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more segments will come on, depending
on the distance. When the seventh seg-
ment illuminates, you have reached the
minimum distance.
앫Front area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red
distance segment illuminates and a
constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the gear selec-
tor lever is placed in position P or the
parking brake is activated.
앫Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red
distance segment illuminates and a
constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the gear selec-
tor lever is placed in position D, P or
the parking brake is activated.
Gear selector
lever position
Warning indicator
DFront area activated
R or NFront and rear area
activated
PNeither activated
238
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Parktronic system
on/off
The Parktronic system can be switched off
manually.
The Parktronic switch is located in the low-
er part of the center console (컄page 30).
1Parktronic switch
2Indicator lamp
Switching off the Parktronic system
왘Press Parktronic switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Switching on the Parktronic system
왘Press Parktronic switch 1 again.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
Parktronic system malfunction
If only the red distance segments illumi-
nates and an acoustic warning sounds,
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system. The Parktronic system will auto-
matically switch off after 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch
comes on.
왘Have the Parktronic system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
If only the red distance segments illumi-
nates and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty or
there is an interference from other radio or
ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system
will automatically switch off after
20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the
Parktronic switch comes on.
왘Switch off the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(컄page 336).
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
or
왘Check the Parktronic system operation
at another location to rule out interfer-
ence from outside radio or ultrasonic
signals.
iThe Parktronic system is automatically
switched on when the ignition is switched on
(컄page 38).
239
Controls in detail
Loading
왔Loading
Roof rack*
1Trim
왘Open trim 1 at the trim strips in the
roof.
왘Secure the roof rack according to
manufacturer’s instructions for instal-
lation.
Loading instructions
The total load weight including vehicle
occupants and luggage/cargo should not
exceed the total load limit indicated on the
corresponding placard located on the driv-
er’s door B-pillar.
The handling characteristics of a fully load-
ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra-
tions shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Always place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should
always be kept as low as possible since it
influences the handling characteristics of
the vehicle.
Warning! G
Only use roof racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly at-
tached roof rack system or its load could be-
come detached from the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
220 lb (100 kg).
Take into consideration that when the roof
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the
vehicles without the roof rack loaded.
!Load the roof rack in such a way that the ve-
hicle cannot be damaged while driving.
Make sure
앫you can fully raise the tilt/sliding sunroof
앫you can fully open the trunk
240
Controls in detail
Loading
Ski bag* (Canada only)
Unfolding and loading
왘Fold rear armrest down (arrow).
1Cover
2Catch
왘Pull catches 2 in direction of arrows.
왘Open the cover 1 downwards in the
direction of the arrow.
1Hook and loop fastener
왘Unfasten hook and loop fastener 1.
왘Pull ski bag into passenger compart-
ment and unfold.
왘Open the front storage compartment in
the rear center console (컄page 248).
왘Remove the cup holder (컄page 248).
Warning! G
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ly as possible fastening materials appropri-
ate for the weight and size of the load.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle and can cause in-
jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when transporting cargo. Put luggage or car-
go in the trunk if possible. Do not pile lug-
gage or cargo higher than the seat backs.
Do not place anything on the rear-window
shelf.
Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-
hicle interior, resulting in unconsciousness
and death.
241
Controls in detail
Loading
1Button
왘Open the trunk.
왘Press button 1.
The flap opens in direction of arrow.
왘From trunk, slide skis into ski bag. 1Strap
왘Tighten strap 1 by pulling at the loose
end (arrow) until the skis in the ski bag
are tightly secured.
Warning! G
The ski bag is designed for up to four pairs
of skis. Do not load the ski bag with other
objects.
Always fasten the ski bag securely. In an ac-
cident, an unfastened ski bag can cause in-
jury to vehicle occupants.
컄컄
242
Controls in detail
Loading
1Cover
왘With insert or cup holder removed, fold
cover 1 upward.
1Hook
2Eye
왘Connect hook 1 to eye 2 located in
the front storage compartment in the
rear center console.
왘Tighten strap by pulling at the loose
end (arrow).
Unloading and folding
왘Loosen both straps.
왘Disconnect hook 1 from eye 2.
왘Unload skis.
왘Close flap in trunk.
왘Fold and flatten ski bag lengthwise.
왘Place folded ski bag inside recess of
backrest.
왘Fasten hook and loop fastener
왘Close ski bag compartment cover.
컄컄
243
Controls in detail
Loading
Removal of ski bag
For removal of the ski bag, we recommend
that you contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Cargo tie-down rings
Four rings are located in the trunk.
왘Carefully secure cargo by applying
even load on all rings with rope of suffi-
cient strength to hold down the cargo.
Always follow loading instructions
(컄page 239).
Retaining hooks
Depending on vehicle production date one
or two hooks are located on the upper
edge of the trunk and can be used to at-
tach cargo items such as bags.
왘Pull tab 1 of retaining hook 2 down.
Warning! G
Never drive vehicle with trunk open while
the ski bag is removed. Deadly carbon mon-
oxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior,
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
iTo prevent unauthorized persons from ac-
cess to the trunk, always close the cover.
!Do not use the retaining hooks to tie down
cargo.
244
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments Glove box
Opening and closing the glove box
왘Press glove box lid release 3 to open.
The glove box lid opens downward.
왘Push lid up to close.
Locking and unlocking the glove box
왘Insert mechanical key (컄page 396)
into the glove box lock.
왘Turn the mechanical key to position 2
to lock or to position 1 to unlock the
glove box.
Storage compartment/telephone*
compartment under center armrest
1Button to open storage/telephone*
compartment
2Cover
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on the shelf
below the rear window.
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident.
1Unlocked
2Locked
3Glove box lid release
245
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening
왘Press button 1 right or left and fold
the cover 2 sideward.
Rear storage compartment in the rear
center console
1Power outlet (컄page 251)
2Cover
왘Slide cover 2 back.
Storage compartment in the rear arm-
rest
왘Press the handle upwards and fold the
rear armrest cover up.
Storage compartment under the
driver’s seat
1Tab
왘Pull tab 1 upward.
왘Fold the covering forward.
iThe mobile phone cradle (컄page 254), the
Roadside Assistance button • and the Infor-
mation button ¡ (컄page 257) are located
below the cover 2.
!Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down, as
you could otherwise damage it.
246
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ruffled storage bags
Ruffled storage bags are located on the
back of the front seats.
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Warning! G
USA only: Do not place objects with a com-
bined weight of more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into
the ruffled storage bag. Otherwise, the Oc-
cupant Classification System OCS
(컄page 71) may not be able to properly ap-
proximate the occupant weight category.
The ruffled storage bag is intended for stor-
ing light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net. In an accident, during hard brak-
ing, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
The ruffled storage bag cannot protect
transported goods in the event of an acci-
dent.
Warning! G
The parcel net is intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net. In an accident, during hard brak-
ing, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
247
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holders Cup holder in the center console
Extending the cup holder
왘Briefly press mark on cup holder.
The cup holder automatically extends
upward.
Retracting the cup holder
왘Press mark on cup holder and push cup
holder in until it engages.
Warning! G
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-
ment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
do not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occu-
pants may cause serious personal injury.
Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The cup holder must be extended when in
use with bottles.
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
to you or others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-
dent.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking, vehi-
cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi-
or may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
248
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing the cup holder
왘Extend cup holder (컄page 247).
왘Press mark on cup holder and remove
cup holder by pulling it upward.
Reinstalling the cup holder
왘Insert cup holder into opening.
왘Press mark on cup holder and press
cup holder downward until it engages.
Cup holder in the rear center console
1Cover
왘Slide cover 1 forward.
Removing cup holder
1Cup holder
2Locking pin
왘Move pin 2 in direction of arrow to un-
lock the cup holder.
왘With the cup holder unlocked, take cup
holder 1 out upwards.
Reinstalling cup holder
왘Insert cup holder 1.
왘Move pin 2 against direction of arrow
to lock the cup holder.
iThe cup holder can be removed for cleaning.
Clean the cup holder with clear, lukewarm water.
!Make sure that the cup holder is correctly
positioned in the guide while you are reinstalling
it. Otherwise the cup holder can be damaged.
iThe cup holder can be removed for cleaning.
Clean the cup holder with clear, lukewarm water.
249
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
왘Briefly press the front of the rear arm-
rest.
The cup holder extends automatically.
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
1Cover
2Sliding button
Opening ashtray
왘Briefly press the marking on the bot-
tom of cover 1.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Removing ashtray insert
왘Secure vehicle from movement by set-
ting the parking brake. Move the gear
selector lever to position N.
Now you have more room to take out
the insert.
왘Push sliding button 2 to the right and
hold.
왘Grip and remove insert from ashtray
frame.
Warning! G
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to
secure vehicle from movement. Move gear
selector lever to position N. With gear selec-
tor lever in position N, turn off the engine.
250
Controls in detail
Useful features
Reinstalling ashtray insert
왘Install insert by pushing it back into
frame until it engages again.
Rear door ashtray
1Sliding button
2Insert slides out
3Ashtray
Opening rear seat ashtray
왘Briefly press the top of ashtray 3.
The ashtray opens.
Removing ashtray insert
왘Push sliding button 1 and remove
insert 2 upwards from ashtray frame.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
왘Install insert by pushing it back into
ashtray frame until it engages again.
Cigarette lighter
Warning! G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Make sure that any children traveling with
you do not injure themselves or start a fire
with the hot cigarette lighter.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could re-
sult in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
251
Controls in detail
Useful features
The cigarette lighter is located in the cen-
ter console compartment in front of the
center armrest (컄page 30).
1Cigarette lighter
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
Power outlets
Power outlet in rear center console
1Power outlet
2Cover
왘Slide cover 2 back.
!The lighter socket can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (up
to a maximum 85 W) designed for use with the
standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in
mind, however, that connecting accessories to
the lighter socket (for example extensive con-
necting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do
not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket.
With the socket damaged, the lighter may no
longer be able to be placed in the heating
(pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out
too early with the lighter not hot enough.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC elec-
trical accessories designed for use with a stan-
dard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V
power outlets (컄page 251) in your vehicle
whenever possible.
!Make sure no fluids come into contact with
the power outlet, as this could cause a short cir-
cuit.
iMake sure the override switch is not activat-
ed (컄page 89). The power outlet in the rear cen-
ter console will not function if the override
switch is activated. 컄컄
252
Controls in detail
Useful features
Power outlet in trunk
1Power outlet
Heated steering wheel (Canada only)
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel.
The stalk is on the lower left-hand side of
the steering wheel.
1Switching on
2Switching off
3Indicator lamp
Switching on
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-
tion of arrow 1.
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 3 comes on.
iThe power outlet can be used to accommo-
date 12-V DC electrical accessories (e.g. air
pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum 180 W.
iThe steering wheel heating is temporarily
suspended while indicator lamp 3 remains on
when
앫the temperature of the vehicle interior is
above 86°F (30°C)
앫the temperature of the steering wheel is
above 95°F (35°C)
When these conditions do not apply anymore,
steering wheel heating continues.
컄컄
253
Controls in detail
Useful features
Switching off
왘Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direc-
tion of arrow 2.
The heated steering wheel is switched
off. Indicator lamp 3 goes out.
For information on steering wheel, see
“Multifunction steering wheel”
(컄page 142).
Floormats
1Retainer pins
2Eyelets
Removing
왘Pull floormats off of retainer pins 1.
왘Remove the floormats.
Installing
왘Lay down the floormat.
왘Press the floormat eyelets 2 onto re-
tainer pins 1.
iIndicator lamp 3 flashes or goes out
앫in case of power surge or undervoltage
앫in case of a steering wheel heating malfunc-
tion
iThe steering wheel heating switches off au-
tomatically when you remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch or, on vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*, when you switch off the ignition
(컄page 61) and open the driver’s door.
Warning! G
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fas-
tened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins 1.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if nec-
essary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal
movement.
iTo install or remove the floormat more easi-
ly, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible (컄page 42).
254
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.
When the mobile phone is inserted in the
cradle, you can operate the telephone us-
ing the following devices:
앫mobile phone keypad
앫COMAND (see separate operating in-
structions)
앫buttons s and t on the multi-
function steering wheel
앫Voice Control* (see separate operating
instructions)
See also separate operating manual for in-
structions on how to use the mobile phone.
Warning! G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Warning! G
Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
phone call.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
agement and Data System)1 if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 14 m) every second.
1Observe all legal requirements.
iVarious mobile phone cradles can be in-
stalled in the cockpit. These mobile phone cra-
dles can be obtained from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The functions and services available to you while
using the mobile phone depend on your service
provider and the type of mobile phone you are
using.
255
Controls in detail
Useful features
The cradle is located in the center armrest.
왘Open the telephone compartment un-
der center armrest (컄page 244).
Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone
cradle
Once the mobile phone has been inserted
in the mobile phone cradle, calls can only
be made via the Voice Control*.
왘If applicable, remove the cover for the
external antenna connection from the
back of the mobile phone and store it in
a safe place. Be sure to comply with t he
mobile phone’s operating instructions,
as well.
Example illustration
1Insert the mobile phone
2Connector contact
3Mobile phone cradle
왘Slide the lower end of the mobile phone
into connector contact 2 on
cradle 3.
왘Push the top of the mobile phone in di-
rection of arrow 1, until the lug on the
mobile phone release button engages.
The mobile phone is connected to the
network via the external antenna.
The mobile phone is linked to the
hands-free device and the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
The battery is charged depending on its
charge status and the position of the
SmartKey in the starter switch. The
charge procedure will be indicated in
the mobile phone’s display.
You can place or receive phone calls. You
can control other functions of the mobile
phone via the control system
(컄page 168), COMAND or Voice Control*
(see separate operating instructions).
!Do not try to remove the mobile phone along
with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the
mobile phone cradle.
iWhen you take the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* out of the starter switch, the
mobile phone remains switched on for approx.
10 minutes. If you place or receive a call during
this time, the mobile phone switches off 10 min-
utes after the call has been completed.
256
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing mobile phone from mobile
phone cradle
Example illustration
1Release catch for mobile phone
2Mobile phone cradle
왘Press release catch in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of
mobile phone cradle 2.
Changing mobile phone cradle
If you require a different cradle for your
mobile phone, remove the present cradle
before installing a new one.
Removing an existing mobile phone
cradle
Example illustration
1To release the mobile phone cradle
2To remove the mobile phone cradle
3Mobile phone cradle
왘Press release button in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone
cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2.
Installing a different mobile phone
cradle
Example illustration
1Contact plate
2Recesses
3Mobile phone cradle
왘Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into
recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
왘Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward
until it engages.
iWhen using a flip-style mobile phone, open
flip top before removing from the cradle while a
call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be dis-
connected.
257
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid
Shortly after the completion of your Tele
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a
user ID and password. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock and
more.
The Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫automatic and manual emergency
앫roadside assistance
앫information
The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cel-
lular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the COMAND System or on the multi-
function steering wheel. To raise, turn the
rotary volume control on COMAND System
clockwise or press button æ on the
multifunction steering wheel. To lower,
turn the rotary volume control on
COMAND System control counterclock-
wise or press button ç on the multi-
function steering wheel.
왘To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depend-
ing on the type of response required.
!The initial activation of the Tele Aid system
may only be performed by completing the sub-
scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance
call using the ¡button. Failure to complete
either of these steps will result in a system that
is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding activation,
please call the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
iThe SOS button is located in the overhead
control panel (컄page 259).
The Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ are located below the
center armrest cover (컄page 244).
258
Controls in detail
Useful features
System self-check
Initially, after switching on ignition, mal-
functions are detected and indicated (the
indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ stay on longer
than 10 seconds or do not come on). The
message
Malfunction Visit workshop
appears in the multifunction display.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatical-
ly following an accident in which the emer-
gency tensioning devices (ETDs) or
air bags deploy.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See (컄page 259) for
instructions on initiating an emergency call
manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp on the SOS button will
begin to flash. The message
Connecting call
appears in the multi-
function display. When the connection is
established, the message
Call connected
appears in the multifunction display. All in-
formation relevant to the emergency, such
as the location of the vehicle (determined
by the GPS satellite location system), vehi-
cle model, identification number and color
are generated.
!The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular net-
work for communication and the GPS (Global Po-
sitioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If
either of these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if this oc-
curs, assistance must be summoned by other
means.
iWhen a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the
COMAND System audio is muted and the select-
ed mode (radio, tape or CD) pauses. The optional
cellular phone (if installed) and inserted in cradle
switches off. If you must use this phone, we rec-
ommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a
standstill in a safe location. Remove the phone
from the cradle and place the call. The naviga-
tion* system (if engaged) will continue to run.
The multifunction display in the instrument clus-
ter is available for use, and spoken commands
are only available by pressing the RPT button on
the COMAND System. A pop-up window will ap-
pear in the COMAND System display to indicate
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. After the Tele
Aid call has ended, the optional cellular phone
switches on again. A PIN entry might be neces-
sary.
Warning! G
If the indicator lamps on the SOS button, on
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or on
the Information button remain illuminated
continuously in red and/or the message
Malfunction Visit workshop
is
displayed in the multifunction display after
the system self-check, a malfunction in the
system has been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
259
Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon af-
ter the emergency call has been initiated.
The Response Center will attempt to
determine more precisely the nature of the
accident provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if
앫it has been activated and is operation-
al. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
앫the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response cen-
ter
Initiating an emergency call manually
1Cover
2SOS button
왘Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover will open.
왘Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
왘Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
iLocation of the vehicle on a map is only pos-
sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from
the GPS satellite network and pass the informa-
tion on to the Response Center.
Warning! G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
vant cellular phone network is not available).
The message
Call failed
appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
moned by other means.
260
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button •
The Roadside Assistance button • is
located below the center armrest cover.
왘Open the storage compartment under
the center armrest (컄page 244).
왘Press and hold button (for longer than
2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
Connecting call
will appear in the
multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message
Call connected
appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established.
왘Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
as labor and/or towing, charges may ap-
ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Man-
ual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
Warning! G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
tion. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they re-
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occu-
pants.
iWhile the call is connected you can change
to the navigation menu by pressing NAVI button
on the COMAND System unit.
261
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button ¡
The Information button ¡ is located
below the center armrest cover.
왘Open the storage compartment under
the center armrest (컄page 244).
왘Press and hold button (for longer than
2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message
Connecting call
will appear
in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message
Call connected
appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and lo-
cation (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
lished. Information regarding the operation
of your vehicle, the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
USA products and services is available to
you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
arately) to learn more (USA only).
iThe indicator lamp on the Roadside
Assistance button • remains illuminated in
red for approximately 10 seconds during the sys-
tem self-check after switching on the ignition (to-
gether with the SOS button and the Information
button ¡).
See system self-check (컄page 258) if the indi-
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance
button • is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the rele-
vant cellular phone network was not available).
The message
Call failed
appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us-
ing the t button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel or the END Button on the COMAND
System.
iWhile the call is connected, you can change
to the navigation menu by pressing NAVI button
on the COMAND System.
iThe indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red for ap-
proximately 10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth-
er with the SOS button and the Roadside
Assistance button •).
See system self-check (컄page 258) if the indi-
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
262
Controls in detail
Useful features
Call priority
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are
active, an Emergency call is still possible.
In this case, the Emergency call will take
priority and override all other active calls.
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
왘Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your pass-
word which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘Then return to your vehicle and pull the
tailgate recessed handle for minimum
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message
Connecting call
ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
cle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cel-
lular phone network is not available). The mes-
sage
Call failed
appears in the
multifunction display.
Information calls can be terminated using
the t button on the multifunction steering
wheel or the END Button on the COMAND Sys-
tem.
!If the indicator lamps do not start flashing
after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu-
minated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system
has detected a malfunction or the service is not
currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and have
the system checked or contact the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possi-
ble.
iThe indicator lamp in the respective button
flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
calls can only be terminated by a Response Cen-
ter or Customer Assistance Center representa-
tive, whereas Roadside Assistance and
Information calls can also be terminated by
pressing button t on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel or using the END button on the
COMAND System.
!If the indicator lamp continues to flash or
the system does not reset, contact the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Ser-
vice at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.
263
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered
incident report.
왘Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Response Center will
contact the local law enforcement and
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
provided to law enforcement.
Garage door opener
The integrated remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices. It provides a convenient way to re-
place up to three hand-held remote con-
trols used to operate devices such as
garage door openers, gate openers, or oth-
er devices compatible with HomeLink® or
some other systems.
Before the integrated remote control can
be used, it must be programmed to the ga-
rage door opener, gate operator or other
device you wish to operate. See the follow-
ing instructions for programming informa-
tion.
iThe remote door unlock feature is available
if the relevant cellular phone network is avail-
able.
The SOS button will flash and the message
Connecting call
will appear in the multifunc-
tion display to indicate receipt of the door unlock
command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center
specialist may attempt to establish voice contact
with the vehicle occupants.
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for
more than 20 seconds before door unlock autho-
rization was received by the Response Center,
you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the tail-
gate recessed handle again.
iWhen the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call
is initiated automatically to the Response Cen-
ter. See anti-theft alarm system (컄page 99).
264
Controls in detail
Useful features
Interior rear view mirror with integrated re-
mote control
1Indicator lamp
2 3 4Signal transmitter button
Needed for programming (not part of vehi-
cle equipment):
5Hand-held remote control of ga-
rage door opener, gate operator
or other device
6Hand-held remote control but-
ton
Programming integrated remote
control
Step 1:
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
Warning! G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent po-
tential harm or damage. When programming
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
down. When programming a gate operator,
the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
– signaling the door to stop and reverse –
does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health.
All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
265
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 2:
왘If you have previously programmed a
signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to
step 3.
If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time, press
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
ter buttons 2 and 4 and release
them only when indicator lamp 1 be-
gins to flash after approximately
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
dure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory.
If you later wish to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter
buttons, do not repeat this step and be-
gin directly with step 3.
Step 3:
왘Hold the end of hand-held remote
control 5 of the device you wish to
train approximately 2 to 5 in
(5 to12 cm) away from the signal trans-
mitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be pro-
grammed, while keeping indicator
lamp 1 in view.
Step 4:
왘Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control
button 6 and the desired signal trans-
mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
release the buttons until step 5 is com-
pleted.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
Step 5:
왘After indicator lamp 1 changes from a
slow to a rapidly flashing light, release
the hand-held remote control button
and the signal transmitter button.
Step 6:
왘Press and hold the just-trained signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe indicator lamp 1.
If indicator lamp 1 stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the respective signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and re-
leased.
Step 7:
왘To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
iIndicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the
first time the signal transmitter button is pro-
grammed. If this button has already been pro-
grammed, the indicator lamp will only start
flashing after 20 seconds.
iIf indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about
2 seconds and then turns to a constant light,
continue with programming steps 8 through 12
as your garage door opener may be equipped
with the “rolling code” feature.
266
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 8:
왘Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the
“training” button may also be referred
to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there
is difficulty locating the transmitting
button, refer to the garage door opener
operator’s manual.
Step 9:
왘Press the “training” button on the ga-
rage door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
ing two steps.
Step 10:
왘Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the pro-
grammed signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4).
Step 11:
왘Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
same signal transmitter button a sec-
ond time to complete the training pro-
cess.
Step 12:
왘Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed signal trans-
mitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 13:
왘To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
iSome garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same
signal transmitter button a third time to com-
plete the training process.
267
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 4:
왘Press and hold the signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been successful-
ly trained.
왘While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
“cycle” your hand-held remote control
button 6 as follows: Press and hold
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release
it for 2 seconds, and again press and
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se-
quence on the hand-held remote con-
trol until the frequency signal has been
learned. Upon successful training, indi-
cator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds.
왘Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
Reprogramming a single signal trans-
mitter button
To program a device using a signal trans-
mitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Do not release the button.
왘Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash af-
ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
signal transmitter button, proceed with
programming starting with step 3.
Operation of integrated remote control
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Select and press the appropriate inte-
grated signal transmitter button (2,
3 or 4) to activate the remote con-
trolled device.
The integrated remote control trans-
mitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Erasing integrated remote control
memory
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Simultaneously press and hold outer
signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4,
for approximately 20 seconds, until
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
iUpon completion of programming the inte-
grated remote control, make sure you retain the
hand-held remote control that came with the ga-
rage door opener, gate operator or other device.
You may need it for use in other vehicles, for fu-
ture programming of an integrated remote con-
trol, or simply for continued use as a hand-held
remote control to operate the respective device
in other situations.
iIf you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.
268
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming tips
If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are
some helpful tips:
앫Check the frequency of hand-held re-
mote control 5 (typically located on
the reverse side of the remote). The in-
tegrated remote control is compatible
with radio-frequency devices operating
between 280-390 MHz.
앫Put a new battery in hand-held remote
control 5. This will increase the likeli-
hood of the hand-held remote control
sending a faster and more accurate sig-
nal to the integrated remote control.
앫While performing step 3, hold
hand-held remote control 5 at differ-
ent lengths and angles from the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying an-
gles at the distance of 2 to 5 in (5 to
12 cm) away or the same angle at vary-
ing distances.
앫If another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
programming steps again using that
other hand-held remote control. Make
sure new batteries are in the hand-held
remote control before beginning the
procedure.
앫Straighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This
may help improve transmitting and/or
receiving signals.
iCertain types of garage door openers are in-
compatible with the integrated remote control. If
you should experience further difficulties with
programming the integrated remote control,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
iUSA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
iCanada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
269
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
270
Operation
In the “Operation” section you will find de-
tailed information on operating, maintain-
ing and caring for your vehicle.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satis-
fied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of
maximum rpm in each gear).
앫Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
앫Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
앫Select C as the preferred shift program
(컄page 177) for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may grad-
ually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-
ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
the engine or the rear differential has been
replaced.
!Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
앫During the first 1 000 miles (1500 km), do
not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫During this period, avoid engine speeds
above 4500 rpm in each gear.
iAlways obey applicable speed limits.
271
Operation
Driving instructions
왔Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-
pends on driving habits and operating con-
ditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫Keep tires at the recommended infla-
tion pressures.
앫Remove unnecessary loads.
앫Remove roof rack when not in use.
앫Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
eration.
앫Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the Mainte-
nance Booklet and as required by the
Maintenance System. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly area.
Drinking and driving Pedals
Warning! G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combina-
tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac-
cident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Warning! G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
structing the pedals range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
have sufficient clearance.
272
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance Brakes
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only sub-
jected to moderate loads, you should occa-
sionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Warning! G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle.
Warning! G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through wa-
ter deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effec-
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
dent.
!Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 0
or 1) when testing the brakes on a brake test dy-
namometer and such testing should be no longer
than 10 seconds.
Active braking action through ESP® may other-
wise seriously damage the brake system which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War-
ranty.
273
Operation
Driving instructions
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (컄page 92).
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the res-
ervoir.
The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster comes on and an
acoustic warning sounds although the
parking brake is released (컄page 344).
Observe additional messages in the multi-
function display that may appear
(컄page 372).
Have the brake system inspected immedi-
ately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
park, so that the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.
Warning! G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking ma-
neuvers.
Warning! G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
Be certain to read and observe the warning
notices on brake pad replacement
(컄page 371).
!When driving down long and steep grades,
relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
274
Operation
Driving instructions
High-performance brake system
(CLS 63 AMG only)
The high-performance brake system is de-
signed to operate under the extremely high
operating demands required to accommo-
date the performance capabilities of the
vehicle. The brakes may produce a squeak-
ing-type noise depending on the
앫vehicle speed
앫brake force applied
앫ambient conditions, e.g. temperature
and humidity
As with any brake system, the wear of indi-
vidual brake system components such as
brake pads or disks strongly depends on
your driving style and the conditions under
which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driv-
ing style calling for high demand braking
will cause your vehicle’s brakes to wear
more quickly.
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the oper-
ating temperature has been reached.
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an ex-
tended period with the ESP® switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drive train which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
New vehicle brake pads and discs, and
replacement brake pads and discs may take
several hundred miles of driving until they
provide optimum braking efficiency. Until
that time, you may need to use increased
brake pedal pressure while braking. Please
be aware of this and adjust your driving and
braking accordingly during this break-in
period.
Excessive high demand braking will cause
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and brake condition mes-
sages in the multifunction display. Especial-
ly for high performance driving, it is
important to maintain and have the brake
system checked regularly.
!When driving off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended
period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War-
ranty.
!Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
275
Operation
Driving instructions
Parking
Tires
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approx-
imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be re-
placed.
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Warning! G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result
of vehicle movement, before turning off the
engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫Slowly release brake pedal.
앫Slowly release brake pedal.
앫When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
앫Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, or press
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*).
앫Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
when leaving.
Warning! G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
tion to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
276
Operation
Driving instructions
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if the
tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
atures).
For more information, see “Tires and
wheels” (컄page 293).
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning! G
Although the applicable federal motor vehi-
cle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the treadwear indicators (TWI) be-
come visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1/8in (3 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning! G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
277
Operation
Driving instructions
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(컄page 327) with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to make sure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise
appropriate caution.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru-
dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail-
ing conditions.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of:
앫CLS 550
CLS 550 (Sport Package*):
130 mph (210 km/h)
앫CLS 63 AMG:
155 mph (250 km/h)
앫CLS 63 AMG (Performance Package*):
186 mph (300 km/h)
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
may have a tire speed rating above the
maximum speed permitted by the elec-
tronic speed limiter.
Make sure your tires have the required tire
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
the “Technical data” section (컄page 438),
for example when purchasing new tires.
!Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War-
ranty.
Warning! G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
mum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
278
Operation
Driving instructions
For information on how to identify the tire
speed rating on a tire’s sidewall, see “Tire
size designation, load and speed rating”
(컄page 314).
If you are uncertain about the correct read-
ing of the information given on a tire’s side-
wall, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to assist you.
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
rective steering action.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal braking effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien-
cy should be tested as soon as possible
after driving is resumed.
iFor information on speed rating for winter
tires, see “Winter driving” (컄page 327).
For additional general information on tire speed
markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating”
(컄page 316).
iFor more information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains” (컄page 328).
Warning! G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
vent this type of control loss.
279
Operation
Driving instructions
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄page 327).
Standing water
Warning! G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking ma-
neuvers.
Warning! G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle
interior resulting in unconsciousness and
possible death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the ve-
hicle not facing the wind.
Warning! G
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice.
!Do not drive through flooded areas or water
of unknown depth. Before driving through water,
determine its depth. Never accelerate before
driving into water. The bow wave could force wa-
ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive
slowly to prevent water from entering the pas-
senger compartment or the engine compart-
ment. Water in these areas could cause damage
to electrical components or wiring of the engine
or transmission, or could result in water being in-
gested by the engine through the air intake caus-
ing severe internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
280
Operation
Driving instructions
Passenger compartment
Driving abroad
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Control and operation of
radio transmitter
COMAND, radio and telephone*
Telephones and two-way radios
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
phone or a citizens band unit should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
Warning! G
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
ly as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
Warning! G
Please do not forget that your primary re-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit
Management and Data System), radio or
telephone1 if road, weather and traffic con-
ditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 14 m) every second.
1Observe all legal requirements.
Warning! G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
281
Operation
Driving instructions
Catalytic converter
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial
control of the pollutants in the exhaust
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our rec-
ommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. Emission control
Certain parts of the engine and the emis-
sion control system serve to keep the toxic
components of the exhaust gases within
permissible limits required by law.
These systems will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to fac-
tory specifications. Any adjustments on
the engine should, therefore, be carried
out only by qualified Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered
in any way. Moreover, the specified service
procedures must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
!To prevent damage to the catalytic convert-
ers, only use premium unleaded gasoline in this
vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation
should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, exces-
sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic con-
verter, causing it to overheat, which could
potentially start a fire.
Warning! G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or
operate this vehicle in areas where combus-
tible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire. Warning! G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-
consciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one win-
dow fully open at all times.
282
Operation
Driving instructions
Coolant temperature
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to approximately
248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature over 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning! G
앫Driving when your engine is badly over-
heated can cause some fluids, which
may have leaked into the engine com-
partment, to catch fire. You could be
seriously burned.
앫Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
283
Operation
At the gas station
왔At the gas station
Refueling
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
1Fuel filler flap
2Fuel filler cap
3Holder
왘Turn the engine off
앫by turning the SmartKey to
position 0.
앫by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button. Open the driv-
er’s door (with the driver’s door
open, starter switch is now in
position 0, same as SmartKey
removed from starter switch).
Warning! G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious per-
sonal injury.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate-
rials near gasoline!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in-
haling fumes and skin or clothing contact,
extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha-
lation of fuel vapors can damage your
health.
!Damage resulting from the use of non ap-
proved fuels or fuel additives or resulting from
mixing gasoline with diesel fuel is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
컄컄
284
Operation
At the gas station
왘Open fuel filler flap 1 by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap springs open.
왘Turn fuel cap 2 counterclockwise and
hold on to it until possible pressure is
released.
왘Take off fuel cap 2 and place it into
holder 3 located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
왘Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top off or over-
fill.
왘Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise
until it audibly engages.
왘Close the fuel filler flap.
Warning! G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres-
sure in the system which could cause a gas-
oline fuel discharge. This could cause the
gasoline fuel to spray back out when remov-
ing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause
personal injury.
iMake sure to close the fuel filler flap before
locking your vehicle as the flap locking pin pre-
vents closing after you have locked the vehicle.
iLeaving the engine running and the fuel cap
open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp to flash and the malfunction indi-
cator lamp ú(USA only) or the malfunction
indicator lamp ±(Canada only) to illuminate.
See also “Practical hints” section (컄page 345).
iOnly use premium unleaded gasoline with a
minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of
96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline
quality can normally be found on the fuel pump.
For more information on gasoline, see the Facto-
ry Approved Service Products pamphlet.
컄컄
285
Operation
At the gas station
Check regularly and before a long trip
1Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system*
For more information on refilling the
reservoir, see “Windshield washer sys-
tem and headlamp cleaning system*”
(컄page 292).
2Engine oil level
For more information on engine oil lev-
el, see “Engine oil” (컄page 287).
3Brake fluid
For more information on brake fluid,
see “Brake fluid” (컄page 451).
4Coolant level
For more information on the coolant
level, see “Coolant level” (컄page 290).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For more
information on replacing light bulbs, see
the “Practical hints” section (컄page 404).
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” (컄page 128).
Tire inflation pressure
For more information, see “Checking tire
inflation pressure” (컄page 302).
!If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see “Practical
hints” (컄page 344).
286
Operation
Engine compartment
Hood
Opening
1Release lever
Warning! G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others.
Warning! G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-
perature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary,
call the fire department.
Warning! G
You could be injured when the hood is open
– even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, let the engine cool off com-
pletely before touching any components on
the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
precautions.
Warning! G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or even restart
after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
Warning! G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components (ig-
nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫with the engine running
앫while starting the engine
앫if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
287
Operation
Engine compartment
왘Pull release lever 1.
The hood is unlocked.
1Lever for opening the hood
왘Push lever 1 on the hood upwards.
왘Pull up on the hood and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
Closing
왘Let the hood drop from a height of
approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
The hood will lock audibly.
왘Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫the vehicle is new
앫the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
!To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or
hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are
folded forward away from the windshield.
Warning! G
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
you do not close the hood on anyone.
Make sure that the hood is securely en-
gaged before driving off. Do not continue
driving if the hood can no longer engage af-
ter an accident, for example. The hood could
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
motion and endanger you and/or others. iDo not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies. Us-
ing special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. More
information on this subject is available at any
Mercedes-Benz Center.
288
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level
When checking the oil level
앫the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
앫with the engine at operating tempera-
ture, the vehicle must have been sta-
tionary for at least 5 minutes with the
engine turned off
앫with the engine not at operating tem-
perature yet, the vehicle must have
been stationary for at least 5 minutes
with the engine turned off
1Oil dipstick
2Upper (max) mark
3Lower (min) mark
To check the engine oil level with the oil
dipstick, do the following:
왘Open the hood (컄page 286).
왘Pull out oil dipstick 1.
왘Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
왘Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
dipstick guide tube.
왘Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
approximately 3 seconds to obtain ac-
curate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is be-
tween the lower (min) mark 3 and
upper (max) mark 2 of oil dipstick 1.
왘If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil, see “Adding engine
oil” (컄page 289).
For more information on engine oil, see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
(컄page 449).
iCLS 550 only:
The filling quantity between the upper and lower
marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
iCLS 63 AMG only:
The filling quantity between the upper and lower
marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
289
Operation
Engine compartment
For more information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine
oil, see the “Practical hints” section
(컄page 377).
Adding engine oil
CLS 550
CLS 63 AMG
왘Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
왘Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
왘Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄page 449) and
(컄page 451).
Transmission fluid level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
check the transmission.
!Only use approved engine oils and oil filters
required for vehicles with Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles).
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil fil-
ters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Prod-
ucts pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle
literature portfolio, or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification
other than those expressly required for the Main-
tenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS
(Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter
at change intervals longer than those called for
by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine
or emission control system damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
!Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
It could cause damage to the engine and emis-
sion control system not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
290
Operation
Engine compartment
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground and the engine
must be cool.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the driver’s side of the engine compart-
ment.
1Marking bar in the expansion tank
2Cap
3Coolant expansion tank
왘Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly approx-
imately one half turn counterclockwise
to release any excess pressure.
왘Continue turning the cap 2 counter-
clockwise and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level:
앫for cold coolant: reaches marking
bar 1 in the expansion tank 3
앫for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
왘Add coolant as required.
왘Replace and tighten cap 2.
For more information on coolant, see the
“Technical data” section (컄page 453).
Warning! G
In order to avoid potentially serious burns:
앫Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
앫Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure.
앫Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres-
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out
under pressure.
앫Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts.
291
Operation
Engine compartment
Battery
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the
trunk on the right hand side (컄page 420):
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve their rated ser-
vice life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-dis-
tance trips, you will need to have the bat-
tery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Warning! G
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking
are prohibited when handling
batteries. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective cloth-
ing, especially gloves, apron and
faceguard.
Wear eye protection.
Rinse any acid spills immediate-
ly with clear water. Contact a
physician if necessary.
Keep children away.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator’s Manual.
292
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.
1Cap for windshield washer reservoir
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of approximately 6.9 US qt
(6.5 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
water. Premix the windshield washer fluid
in a suitable container.
왘Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards.
왘Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
and water (or commercially available
premixed windshield washer sol-
vent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
For more information, see “Windshield and
headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio”
(컄page 456).
Warning! G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
!Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below freezing
point. Failure to do so could result in damage to
the washer system/reservoir.
!Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can dam-
age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
293
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and recommend-
ed rims and tires for summer and winter
operation. They can also offer advice con-
cerning tire service and purchase.
Important guidelines
앫Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.
앫If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as re-
quired.
앫Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths of less than 1/8in (3 mm).
앫The wheels on the front and rear axles
are different. For this reason, pay at-
tention to the markings on the inside of
the wheel rims. Wheels marked “REAR
AXLE ONLY” on the inside of the rim
may only be fitted on the rear axle.
앫When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
Warning! G
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted:
앫The wheel brakes or suspension compo-
nents can be damaged.
앫The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guar-
anteed.
Warning! G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can re-
sult in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on re-
treads. The operating safety of the vehicle
cannot be assured when such tires are used.
294
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month. For more informa-
tion on checking tire inflation pressure see
“Recommended tire inflation pressure”
(컄page 301).
Tire inspection
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
앫excessive treadwear (컄page 294)
앫cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber
앫bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation.
Spare tires will age and become worn over
time even if never used, and thus should be
inspected and replaced when necessary.
Life of tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫Driving style
앫Tire inflation pressure
앫Distance driven
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
than 1⁄8in (3 mm).
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approx-
imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be re-
placed.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫Summer tires 1/8in (3 mm)
앫Winter tires 1/6in (4 mm)
Warning! G
Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam-
aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Warning! G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Warning! G
Although the applicable federal motor safety
laws consider a tire to be worn when the
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recom-
mend that you do not allow your tires
295
Operation
Tires and wheels
1TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Storing tires
Cleaning tires
Direction of rotation
Unidirectional tires offer added advan-
tages, such as better hydroplaning perfor-
mance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.
to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8in (3 mm), the adhesion
properties on a wet road are sharply re-
duced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
!Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible. Pro-
tect tires from contact with oil, grease and gaso-
line.
!Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in dam-
age to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire. iSpare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidi-
rectional tire for temporary use only until the reg-
ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced.
Always observe and follow applicable temporary
use restrictions and speed limitations indicated
on the spare wheel.
296
Operation
Tires and wheels
Loading the vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
1) The Tire and Loading Information
placard can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar. This placard tells you im-
portant information about the number
of people that can be in the vehicle and
the total weight that can be carried in
the vehicle. It also contains information
on the proper size and recommended
tire inflation pressures for the original
equipment tires on your vehicle.
2) The Certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
the gross weight capacity of your vehi-
cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel and cargo. The Certification label
also tells you about the front and rear
axle weight capacity, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
is the total allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear).
Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
either the front axle or rear axle.
1Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the plac-
ard with regards to loading your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information
Warning! G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified total load limit as indicated on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Over-
loading the tires can overheat them, possi-
bly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires
can also result in handling or steering prob-
lems, or brake failure.
iData shown on placard example are for illus-
tration purposes only. Load limit data are specif-
ic to each vehicle and may vary from data shown
in the illustration below. Refer to placard on ve-
hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
297
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information placard
1Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
The placard showing the load limit informa-
tion is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
왘Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.” on this placard.
The combined weight of all occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load
(if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced in that statement.
Seating capacity
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. The Tire and
Loading Information placard showing the
seating capacity is located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄page 296).
1Seating capacity information on the
Tire and Loading Information placard
Steps for determining correct load limit
The following steps have been developed
as required of all manufacturers under Title
49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part
575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Step 1
왘Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
your vehicle’s placard.
Step 2
왘Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
Step 3
왘Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
iData shown on placard example are for illus-
tration purposes only. Load limit data are specif-
ic to each vehicle and may vary from data shown
in the illustration below. Refer to placard on ve-
hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
컄컄
298
Operation
Tires and wheels
Step 4
왘The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lbs. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs.)
Step 5
왘Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
Step 6 (if applicable)
왘If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄page 300).
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s placard (컄page 297).
컄컄
299
Operation
Tires and wheels
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄page 300).
Example Combined
weight limit
of occu-
pants and
cargo from
placard
Number of
occupants
(driver and
passengers)
Seating
configura-
tion
Occupants weight Combined
weight of all
occupants
Available cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (total load limit from
placard minus combined weight of
all occupants)
11500 4front: 2
rear: 2
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
630 lbs 1500 lbs - 630 lbs = 870 lbs
21500 3front: 1
rear: 2
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
540 lbs 1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
31500 1front:1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
300
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(컄page 300) as to not exceed the permis-
sible load limit, you must make sure that
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi-
cle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the
front or rear axle. You can obtain the
GVWR and GAWR from the Certification la-
bel. The Certification label can be found on
the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
data” (컄page 434).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
(컄page 300) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to-
tal allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not ex-
ceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if ap-
plicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a
suitable commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-
tant weight to measure because it affects
the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
added to the weight of all occupants riding
and any cargo you are carrying in the
vehicle. The tongue load typically is be-
tween 10% and 15% of the trailer weight
and everything loaded in it.
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and their
cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recom-
mend trailer towing with your vehicle.
301
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar (컄page 296).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be ad-
justed on cold tires. The tires can be con-
sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least 3 hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard on the driver's B-pillar.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
In addition to the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard on the driver’s door B-pillar,
also consult the fuel filler flap for any addi-
tional information pertaining to special
driving situations. For more information,
see “Important notes on tire inflation
pressure” (컄page 302).
1Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard
lists the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for maximum loaded vehicle
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
apply to the tires installed as original
equipment.
Warning! G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being over-
heated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
iData shown on placard example are for illus-
tration purposes only. Load limit data are specif-
ic to each vehicle and may vary from data shown
in the illustration below. Refer to placard on ve-
hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
302
Operation
Tires and wheels
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire
inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehi-
cle condition. If such information is provid-
ed, it can be found on the placard located
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi-
mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire inflation pressure
where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month.
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least 3 hours or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting less
than 3 hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold tire
inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will
be underinflated.
Warning! G
If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly
drops:
앫Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
앫Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
iDriving comfort may be reduced when the
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for
speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified
on the placard located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
303
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
왘Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire.
왘Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.
왘Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄page 296) or, if available, the inside
of the fuel filler flap. If necessary, add
air to achieve the recommended tire
inflation pressure.
왘Install the valve cap.
왘Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Warning! G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being over-
heated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified total load limit as indicated on the
placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
possibly causing a blowout.
iIf you have overfilled the tire, release tire in-
flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the
valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the
tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.
304
Operation
Tires and wheels
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)
While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rota-
tional speed. This allows the system to de-
tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire.
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due
to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
see a corresponding warning message in
the multifunction display.
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a
restricted manner or with a delay
앫if snow chains are mounted to the
vehicle
앫in winter road conditions prevail in
presence of ice and snow
앫if you are driving on a loose surface
(e.g. sand or gravel)
앫if you are driving in a very sporty man-
ner (involving rapid acceleration or high
speeds in curves)
Warning! G
When the multifunction display shows the
message
Tire pressure Check tires
,
one or more of your tires is significantly un-
der-inflated. You should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s tire Tire and Load-
ing Information placard. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Un-
der-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability. Each tire, in-
cluding the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure as specified
in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
iThe recommended tire inflation pressures
for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard
located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄page 296). The tire inflation pressures are
not listed in the owner’s manual.
Warning! G
The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pres-
sure according to the placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
The Run Flat Indicator does not replace reg-
ular checks of the tire inflation pressures
since a gradual pressure loss in more than
one tire cannot be detected by the Run Flat
Indicator.
The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply-
ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
maneuvers.
305
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
reactivated in the following situations:
앫If you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
앫If you have replaced the wheels or tires
앫If you have installed new wheels or
tires
왘Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, the inside
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is cor-
rect.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
Make sure the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
(컄page 141).
왘Press button k or j repeatedly
until the following message appears in
the multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
active
Menu: R-Button
왘Press the reset button (컄page 27).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Restart
Run Flat Indicator?
Cancel
Yes
If you wish to confirm activation:
왘Press button æ.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
restarted
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure val-
ues for all four tires.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘Press button ç.
or
왘Wait until the message
Restart
Run Flat Indicator?
Cancel
Yes
disappears.
Warning! G
The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in
a reliable manner if you have set the correct
tire inflation pressures for each tire.
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was
set, the system will monitor the pressure ac-
cording to the incorrect value.
306
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire pressure electronically
with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS), (USA only)
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
are equipped with the proper electronic
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-
sure, as selected by the driver, in all four
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
tires.
iThe Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) is equipped with a combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the in-
strument cluster (컄page 27). Depending on
how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS
system itself:
앫If the telltale illuminates continuously, one
or more of your tires is significantly under-in-
flated. There is no malfunction in the TPMS.
앫If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system it-
self is not operating properly.
iThis device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Warning! G
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the supplemental tire pressure in-
formation on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care-
fully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
307
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning! G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significant-
ly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
function indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of in-
compatible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
iIf a condition causing the TPMS to malfunc-
tion develops, it may take up to 10 minutes for
the system to signal a malfunction using the
TPMS telltale flashing and illumination se-
quence.
The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes driv-
ing if the malfunction has been corrected.
iOperating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal-
function.
308
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating the TPMS
The TPMS must be reactivated when you
have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
a new level (e.g. because of different load
or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
recalibrated to the current tire inflation
pressures.
왘Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄page 296) or, if avail-
able, the supplemental tire pressure
information on the inside of the fuel fill-
er flap (컄page 283), make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is cor-
rect.
왘Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu ap-
pears in the multifunction display
(컄page 141).
왘Press the j or kbutton repeat-
edly until you see the flowing message:
Tire pressure
monitor active
Menu: R-button
왘Press the reset button (컄page 27).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Restart
tire pressure
monitor?
Cancel
Yes
왘Press the æbutton.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Tire pres. monitor
restarted
After driving a few minutes the system
verifies that the current tire inflation
pressures are within the system’s
specified range. Afterwards the current
tire inflation pressures are accepted as
reference pressures and then moni-
tored.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘Press the çbutton.
Warning! G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold infla-
tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
iReactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec-
ommended for the vehicle operating condition.
Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold
tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation
pressure on the placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar (컄page 296). Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire pressure information for driv-
ing at high speeds (컄page 302) or for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle con-
dition (컄page 302). If such information is pro-
vided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (컄page 283).
309
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire pressure electronically
with the Advanced Tire Pressure
Monitoring System* (Advanced
TPMS*), (Canada only)
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
are equipped with the proper electronic
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-
sure, as selected by the driver, in all four
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
tires.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display.The present inflation
pressures are displayed only after a few
minutes travel time.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Press the j or kbutton until
the current inflation pressures for each
tire appear in the multifunction display.
iThis device complies with RSS-210 of Indus-
try Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference re-
ceived, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
iPossible differences between the readings
of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas
station equipment, and the vehicle’s control sys-
tem can occur. Usually the readings issued by
the control system are more precise.
iWhen the message
Tire pressure is
only displayed only after driving for
a few minutes
appears in the display, the indi-
vidual inflation pressure values are matched with
the tires. The individual values are displayed af-
ter a few minutes driving.
Warning! G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold infla-
tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle. 컄컄
310
Operation
Tires and wheels
iWith a spare wheel without wheel sensor
mounted, the system may still indicate the tire
inflation pressure of the removed wheel for some
minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that the
indicated value where the spare wheel is mount-
ed does not reflect the actual spare tire inflation
pressure.
Warning! G
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the supplemental tire pressure in-
formation on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care-
fully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
Warning! G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significant-
ly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
컄컄
311
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating Advanced TPMS*
The TPMS must be reactivated when you
have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
a new level (e.g. because of different load
or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
recalibrated to the current tire inflation
pressures.
왘Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, the supple-
mental tire pressure information on the
inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure
the tire inflation pressure of all four
tires is correct.
왘Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu ap-
pears in the multifunction display
(컄page 147).
왘Press the j or kbutton repeat-
edly until you see the current inflation
pressures for each tire appear in the
multifunction display or the following
message appears in the multifunction
display:
Tire pressure is
only displayed
after driving for
a few minutes
왘Press the reset button (컄page 27).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Restart tire
pressure monitor?
iOperating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal-
function.
Warning! G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold infla-
tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
iReactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec-
ommended for the vehicle operating condition.
Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold
tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation
pressure on the placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar (컄page 296). Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire pressure information for driv-
ing at high speeds (컄page 302) or for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle con-
dition. If such information is provided, it can be
found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
컄컄
312
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘Press the æbutton.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Tire pres. monitor
restarted
After a few minutes driving, the current
tire inflation pressure values are ac-
cepted as reference values and then
monitored.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘Press the çbutton.
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
Underinflated tires can:
앫cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫adversely affect fuel economy
앫lead to tire failure from being
overheated
앫adversely affect handling
characteristics
Overinflated tires
Overinflated tires can:
앫adversely affect handling
characteristics
앫cause uneven tire wear
앫be more prone to damage from road
hazards
앫adversely affect ride comfort
앫increase stopping distance
Warning! G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Warning! G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
컄컄
313
Operation
Tires and wheels
MOExtended system*
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there
is a total loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
You may only use the MOExtended system
in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator
(Canada only) (컄page 304) or the TPMS
(USA only) (컄page 306) or the Advanced
TPMS* (Canada only) (컄page 309).
For information on driving in case of pres-
sure loss in one or more tires (emergency
mode), see the “Practical hints” section
(컄page 419).
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
1Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(컄page 320)
2DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(컄page 318)
3Maximum tire load (컄page 319)
4Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄page 320)
5Manufacturer
6Tire ply material (컄page 322)
7Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄page 314)
8Load identification (컄page 317)
9Tire name
iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(컄page 438).
314
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
1Tire width
2Aspect ratio in %
3Radial tire code
4Rim diameter
5Tire load rating
6Tire speed rating
General:
Depending on the design standards used,
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation.
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
Tire width
The tire width 1 (컄page 314) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.
Aspect ratio
The aspect ratio 2 (컄page 314) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio
is arrived at by dividing section height by
section width.
iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
315
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire code
The tire code 3 (컄page 314) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diag-
onal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄page 316).
Rim diameter
The rim diameter 4 (컄page 314) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
indicated in inches (in).
Tire load rating
The tire load rating 5 (컄page 314) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
For example, a load rating of 91 corre-
sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄page 319) where the maximum load as-
sociated with the load index is indicated in
kilograms and lbs. For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(컄page 317).
Warning! G
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR (컄page 323) of your vehi-
cle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
which may cause an accident and/or seri-
ous personal injury to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
Warning! G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified total load limit as indicated on the
placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
tires can also result in handling or steering
problems, or brake failure.
iTire load rating 5 (컄page 314) and Tire
speed rating 6 (컄page 314) are also referred
to as “service description”.
316
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire speed rating
The tire speed rating 6 (컄page 314)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
Summer tires
앫At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for exam-
ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description
is comprised of the tire load rating 5
(컄page 314) and the tire speed
rating 6 (컄page 314).
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 (컄page 314) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed
capability.
If a service description 5 and 6
(컄page 314) is given, the speed capa-
bility is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
the speed rating and the speed capabil-
ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
Warning! G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
iTire load rating 5 (컄page 314) and Tire
speed rating 6 (컄page 314) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Index Speed rating
Qup to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Rup to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Sup to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Tup to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Hup to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Vup to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Wup to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Yup to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
317
Operation
Tires and wheels
앫Any tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
“ZR” in the size designation AND the
service description must be placed in
parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren-
thesis designates the maximum speed
capability of the tire as being above
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
Load identification
1Load identification
In addition to tire load rating, special load
identification 1 may be molded into the
tire sidewall following the letter designat-
ing the tire speed rating 6 (컄page 314).
No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
Index Speed rating
QM+S
1
1or M+S.for winter tires
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
TM+S
1up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
HM+S
1up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
VM+S
1up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
iNot all M+S rated tires provide special win-
ter performance. Make sure the tires you use
show M+S and the mountain/snow-
flake.marking on the tire sidewall. These
tires meet specific snow traction performance
requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers
Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association
of Canada (RAC) and have been designed specif-
ically for use in snow conditions.
iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
318
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facili-
tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
code” and “Date of manufacture”.
1DOT
2Manufacturer’s identification mark
3Tire size
4Tire type code (at the option of the tire
manufacturer)
5Date of manufacture
DOT (Department of Transportation)
A tire branding symbol 1 (컄page 318)
which denotes the tire meets require-
ments of the U.S. Department of Transpor-
tation.
Manufacturer’s identification mark
The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
(컄page 318) denotes the tire
manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-
bols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (컄page 293).
Tire size
The code 3 (컄page 318) indicates the
tire size.
iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
319
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire type code
The code 4 (컄page 318) may, at the
option of the manufacturer, be used as a
descriptive code for identifying significant
characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture 5 (컄page 318)
identifies the week and year of manufac-
ture.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
Maximum tire load
1Maximum tire load rating
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
For more information on tire load rating
(컄page 315).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄page 297).
iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
Warning! G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified total load limit as indicated on the
placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
tires can also result in handling or steering
problems, or brake failure.
320
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire inflation pressure
1Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure (컄page 301) for proper
tire inflation.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance
factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance.
1Treadwear
2Traction
3Temperature resistance
iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
Warning! G
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adverse-
ly affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride com-
fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis-
tance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc. iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
321
Operation
Tires and wheels
Quality grades can be found, where appli-
cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to low-
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep-
resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200 AA A
Warning! G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
322
Operation
Tires and wheels
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Tire ply material
1Plies in sidewall
2Plies under tread
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
Warning! G
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
iFor illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
323
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bars.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
Bar
Another metric unit for air pressure. There
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)
to 1 bar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or driv-
en no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with stan-
dard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
optional equipment, but without passen-
gers and cargo.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
the front and rear axle indicated on the
Certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR indicated on the Certification label
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
324
Operation
Tires and wheels
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passen-
gers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on Cer-
tification label located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals
(kPa) to 1 bar.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
total load limit and production options
weight.
Maximum tire inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Production options weight
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for air pressure
-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Recommended tire inflation pressure
listed on placard located on driver’s door
B-pillar for normal driving conditions.
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
325
Operation
Tires and wheels
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identifica-
tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”.
Tire load rating
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac-
turers also must indicate the ply materials
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Total load limit
Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilo-
grams (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s desig-
nated seating capacity.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
remains.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
326
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄page 295).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configu-
ration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer’s recommended in-
tervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces-
sary, according to the degree of tire wear.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄page 295).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
For information on wheel change, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄page 391) and
(컄page 412).
Warning! G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
of the same size.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Only use Genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
327
Operation
Winter driving
왔Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your
vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service
includes:
앫Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration
앫Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system
Add MB Concentrate “S” to a premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze
which is formulated for temperatures
below freezing point (컄page 456).
앫Battery test
Battery capacity drops with decreasing
ambient temperature. A well charged
battery helps to make sure that the
engine can be started, even at low am-
bient temperatures.
앫Tire change
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated
tires provide special winter performance.
Make sure the tires you use show the
mountain/snowflake.marking on the
tire sidewall. These tires meet specific
snow traction performance requirements
of the Rubber Manufacturers Association
(RMA) and The Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) and have been designed
specifically for use in snow conditions. Use
of winter tires is the only way to achieve
the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and
ESP® in winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure that all
mounted winter tires are of the same make
and have the same tread design.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your ve-
hicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such
notices are available at your tire dealer or
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/6in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
longer suitable for winter operation.
328
Operation
Winter driving
Block heater* (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block
heater.
The electrical cable may be installed at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Snow chains
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
앫Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations
(컄page 438).
앫Use snow chains in pairs and on rear
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
mounting instructions.
앫Only use snow chains that are ap-
proved by Mercedes-Benz. Any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
be glad to advise you on this subject.
앫Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
앫Do not use snow chains on the spare
wheel (컄page 445).
Warning! G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
!When driving with snow chains, always se-
lect the raised level of the level control system
Airmatic (컄page 231). Other settings may result
in damage to your vehicle.
!Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clear-
ance for snow chains. To help avoid serious dam-
age to your vehicle or tires, make sure that the
use of snow chains is permissible as specified in
the “Technical data” section of this Operator’s
Manual, see “Rims and tires” (컄page 438).
!If snow chains are mounted to the front
wheels, they may scrape against the body or axle
components. The tires or the vehicle could be
damaged as a result.
iWhen driving with snow chains, you may
wish to deactivate the ESP® (컄page 95) before
setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve
the vehicle’s traction.
iCLS 63 AMG:
Do not switch off the ESP® when driving in snow
or with snow chains mounted.
329
Operation
Maintenance
왔Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Maintenance Booklet at the times
called for by the maintenance service
indicator.
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
designated times/mileage will result in
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Maintenance service indicator
message
The maintenance service indicator will
notify you when the next maintenance ser-
vice is due.
Starting approximately 1 month before the
next maintenance service is due, one of
the following messages will appear in the
multifunction display while you are driving
or when you switch on the ignition (exam-
ple service A):
Service A in XXXX Miles (km)
Service A in XX Days
Service A in X Day
Service A due now
The maintenance services will be indicated
by showing a service type A through type H
in the multifunction display. Types A
through H are classified based on estimat-
ed time needed to perform the mainte-
nance service, ranging:
from
Service A
(approx. 1 hour)
to
Service H
(approx. 8 hours)
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing
of maintenance services and intervals they
need to be performed at.
330
Operation
Maintenance
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator
The maintenance service indicator mes-
sage is automatically cleared
앫after approximately 10 seconds, when
you switch on the ignition or when
reaching the service threshold while
driving
앫after approximately 30 seconds, once
the suggested maintenance service
term has passed
You can also clear it yourself.
1Reset button
왘Press the reset button 1 on the
instrument cluster.
The maintenance service indicator
message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display (컄page 147).
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term, you will see the
following message in the multifunction
display:
Service A exceeded by XXXXX Miles (km)
Service A exceeded by XXX Days
Service A exceeded by X Day
In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator
following a completed maintenance
service.
iVehicles equipped with Maintenance Sys-
tem only (U.S. vehicles. Canada vehicles, de-
pending on production date):
The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks
distance driven and the time elapsed since the
last maintenance service and calculates other
maintenance service work required.
iVehicles equipped with FSS PLUS (Flexible
Service System PLUS) only (Canada vehicles, de-
pending on production date):
앫FSS PLUS evaluates engine temperature, oil
level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance
driven and the time elapsed since the last
service and calculates other maintenance
service work required.
앫The interval between maintenance services
depends on your driving habits. A gentle driv-
ing style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will length-
en the interval between services.
331
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator
You can call up the maintenance service in-
dicator display, in the multifunction dis-
play, every time, to check when the next
maintenance service is due.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
The standard display of the control sys-
tem appears (컄page 147).
왘Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display appears in
the multifunction display (컄page 141).
왘Press button k or j until the
maintenance service indicator display
with the service symbol 9 and the
service deadline appears in the multi-
function display.
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
In the event that the maintenance service
on your vehicle is not carried out by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
have the maintenance service indicator re-
set. The automotive maintenance facility
carrying out the maintenance service will
find the information for resetting the main-
tenance service indicator in the mainte-
nance-relevant literature for your vehicle.
Such literature is available from either your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
directly from Mercedes-Benz.
iThe menu overview can be found on
(컄page 145).
iIf the battery is disconnected, the days of
disconnection will not be included in the count
shown by the maintenance service indicator. To
arrive at the true maintenance service deadline,
you will need to subtract these days from the
days shown in the maintenance service indicator
message or the maintenance service indicator
display.
Do not confuse the maintenance service indica-
tor with the engine oil level indicator :.
iIf the maintenance service indicator was in-
advertently reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
been performed. Resetting the system without
performing the proper service as called for by
the maintenance service indicator will result in
engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
332
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of vehicle
Regular and proper care will help to main-
tain the value of your vehicle. The best way
to protect your vehicle from harmful envi-
ronmental influences is to wash it and use
protective treatments regularly.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external in-
fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at-
tack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by ex-
treme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
앫Air pollution
앫Road salt
앫Tar
앫Gravel and stone chipping
To avoid paint damage, you should imme-
diately remove:
앫Grease and oil
앫Fuel
앫Coolant
앫Brake fluid
앫Bird droppings
앫Insects
앫Tree resins etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or elimi-
nates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫near the ocean
앫in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
앫during winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
ough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Warning! G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the partic-
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de-
signed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.
333
Operation
Vehicle care
Your vehicle has been treated at the facto-
ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others ap-
plied later.
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
Power washer
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
!Follow the instructions provided by the pow-
er washer manufacturer on maintaining a dis-
tance between the vehicle and the nozzle of the
power washer.
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires.
The intense jet of water can result in damage to
the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across the
surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts,
electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber
parts.
iVehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close prox-
imity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently
locked or unlocked.
334
Operation
Vehicle care
Paintwork, painted body components
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
normally be done every 3 to 5 months, de-
pending on the climate and washing deter-
gent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
왘Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical compo-
nents and connectors from contact with
water and cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticor-
rosion Wax, should be applied to the en-
gine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control link-
age bushings and joints should be lubricat-
ed. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should
be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do
not forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.
!Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape or
similar materials to painted body components
may damage the paintwork.
iVehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close prox-
imity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently
locked or unlocked.
335
Operation
Vehicle care
Hand-wash
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight.
왘Only use a mild car wash detergent,
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo.
왘Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
fused jet of water.
Direct only a very weak spray towards
the ventilation intake.
왘Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
왘Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
dry with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
the finish.
Automatic car wash
You can have your car washed in an auto-
matic car wash from the start. Automatic
car washes without brushes are prefera-
ble.
왘To protect the filter system, switch the
automatic climate control to air recir-
culation mode (컄page 192) or
(컄page 193).
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it be-
fore running it through the automatic car
wash.
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of ornamen-
tal moldings, use a damp cloth.
!Do not use scouring agents on these parts.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint.
!Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
touchless car wash which uses caustic spray.
Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the
paint or ornamental moldings.
!Make sure that the windshield wiper switch
is set to 0(컄page 57). Otherwise, e.g. the rain
sensor could activate and cause the wipers to
move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle
damage.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior
rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent dam-
age to the mirrors.
iAfter running the vehicle through an auto-
matic car wash, wipe any wax off of the wind-
shield (컄page 337). This will prevent smears
and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by
residual wax on the windshield.
When leaving the car wash, make sure that the
mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may vi-
brate.
!Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
moldings. Although ornamental moldings may
have chrome appearance, they could be made of
anodized aluminum that will be damaged when
cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a
damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you
are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome clean-
er. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is
chrome-plated, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
336
Operation
Vehicle care
Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
turn signal lenses
왘Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo, with plenty of water.
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor
cover
1Distronic system sensor cover
왘Switch off the ignition (컄page 60).
왘Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
poo, with plenty of water and a
non-scratching cloth to clean sensor
cover 1.
왘Restart the engine after cleaning sen-
sor cover 1.
Cleaning the Parktronic* system
sensors
1Parktronic system* sensors in the front
bumper
왘Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
poo, with plenty of water and a soft,
non-scratching cloth to clean
sensors 1 on the bumpers.
!Only use window cleaning solutions that are
suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window clean-
ing solutions which are not suitable may damage
the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. There-
fore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners
that contain solvents.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses.
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens
surface.
!To prevent scratches or damage, never ap-
ply strong force and only use a soft, non-scratch-
ing cloth when cleaning the sensor cover 1. Do
not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.
337
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades
왘Make sure the hood is fully closed.
왘Switch on the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Turn combination switch to wiper
setting u (컄page 57).
왘With wiper arms in vertical position,
switch off the ignition (컄page 60). 왘Fold the wiper arms forward until they
snap into place.
왘Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
왘Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win-
dow cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
mended.
!Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor
covers. Applying strong pressure may damage
the sensor covers.
Follow the instructions provided by the power
washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance
between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
!To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth
when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to
wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.
!The windshield wipers must be in a vertical
position before folding them away from the wind-
shield. They could otherwise damage the hood.
Never open the hood when the wiper arms are
folded forward.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning the windshield
and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
!Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear.
컄컄
338
Operation
Vehicle care
Light alloy wheels
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
왘Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
spray of water for cleaning the light al-
loy wheels.
Plastic and rubber parts
왘Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution.
왘Wipe with a cloth moistened in a luke-
warm solution.
The surface may temporarily change
color. If this is the case, wait for it to
dry.
!Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey in
the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
!To clean the window interior, do not use a
dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners con-
taining solvents. Do not touch the inside of the
front, rear or side windows with hard objects
such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.
!Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid
may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.
!The vehicle should not be parked for an ex-
tended period of time immediately after it has
been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims
have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner.
Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased corro-
sion of the brake disks and brake pads.
Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage
the wheel paint if the car is not driven after
cleaning. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
should always be warmed-up before it is parked
after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle
for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire
Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
products, take care not to spray them on the
brake disks.
Warning! G
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or
the steering wheel. Cleaners containing sol-
vents will make the surface porous and vehi-
cle occupants could suffer serious injuries
from plastic parts coming loose in the event
of air bag deployment.
컄컄
339
Operation
Vehicle care
Hard plastic trim items
왘Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
왘Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor-
oughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz
approved Leather Care.
Carpets
왘Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet
and Fabric Care for cleaning the car-
pets.
Headliner and shelf below rear window
왘Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-sham-
poo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Seat belts
왘Only use clear, lukewarm water and
soap.
Upholstery
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently dis-
colored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
!Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on
these parts.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the sur-
face.
!Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the sur-
face.
!The seat belts must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat
belts at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in
direct sunlight.
Warning! G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Warning! G
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of the active head restraints. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
availability.
340
Operation
Vehicle care
Leather upholstery
Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject to
a natural aging process. Leather uphol-
stery may also react to certain ambient in-
fluences such as high humidity or high
temperature by showing wrinkles for ex-
ample.
왘Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning per-
forated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
Wood trims
왘Dampen cloth using water and use
damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
vehicle.
!Wipe with light pressure to avoid damage to
the upholstery.
!Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these
may be abrasive.
341
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
342
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instru-
ment cluster fails to come on during the
bulb self-check when switching on the igni-
tion, have the respective bulb checked and
replaced if necessary.
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
-The yellow ABS indicator lamp
comes on while the engine is
running.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and has
switched off. The BAS, EBP, ESP® and
PRE-SAFE® are also switched off (see messages
in multifunction display).
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the ABS available.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other
systems such as the Parktronic system*, Dis-
tronic*, navigation system*, or the automatic
transmission may also be malfunctioning.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display (컄page 356).
왘Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions in-
creases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts.
The ABS has switched off.
The battery may not be sufficiently charged.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again and
the ABS indicator lamp should go out.
If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
왘Have the generator (alternator) and
battery checked.
343
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
vThe yellow ESP® warning lamp
comes on while the engine is
running.
The ESP® is deactivated.
Risk of accident!
When the ESP® is switched off it will not sta-
bilize the vehicle if the system recognizes
that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
is spinning.
왘Switch the ESP® back on (컄page 98)
Exceptions: (컄page 95).
If the ESP® cannot be switched back on,
have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
vThe yellow ESP® warning lamp
flashes while driving.
The ESP® or traction control has come into
operation because of detected traction loss
in at least one tire.
The cruise control or Distronic* is deactivat-
ed.
왘When driving off, apply as little throt-
tle as possible.
왘While driving, ease up on the acceler-
ator.
왘Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
왘Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (컄page 95).
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of accidents.
344
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
;(USA only)
3(Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
You are driving with the parking brake set. 왘Release the parking brake.
;(USA only)
3(Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on when the engine is
running and you hear a warning
sound.
There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.
왘Risk of accident! Do not drive any
further. Consult a Mercedes-Benz
Service Center. Under no circum-
stances should you top up the brake
fluid. This will not solve the problem.
Warning! G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-
nated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add
brake fluid before checking the brake
system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You
can be seriously burned.
!If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
345
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
ú (USA only)
± (Canada only)
The yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on while
driving.
There is a malfunction in:
앫The fuel management system
앫The ignition system
앫The emission control system
앫Systems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode.
왘Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system.
It allows the accurate identification of
system malfunctions through the read-
out of diagnostic trouble codes. It is
located in the front left area of the foot-
well next to the parking brake.
iSome states may by law require you to con-
tact a workshop immediately as soon as the en-
gine malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Check local requirements.
346
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
ú (USA only)
± (Canada only)
The yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on while
driving.
A loss of pressure has been detected in the
fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed
properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
왘Check the fuel cap.
If it is not closed properly:
왘Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Your fuel tank is empty. 왘After refuelling start, turn off and re-
start the engine three or four times in
succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
347
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
DThe red coolant temperature
warning lamp comes on when
the engine is running.
There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir.
If this warning lamp comes on frequently,
there is a leak in the cooling system.
If the coolant level is correct, the electric
radiator fan may be broken.
왘Immediately add coolant to prevent
engine from overheating
(컄page 290).
왘Have the cooling system checked.
왘If the coolant temperature is below
248°F (120°C), you can continue
driving to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving
uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
DThe red coolant temperature
warning lamp comes on while
driving and you hear a warning
sound.
The coolant temperature has exceeded
248°F (120°C).
왘Stop in a safe location as soon as pos-
sible and allow the engine and coolant
to cool down.
Warning! G
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
348
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
lThe red distance warning lamp
comes on while driving.
You are too close to the vehicle in front
of you to maintain selected speed.
왘Apply the brakes immediately to increase
the following distance.
lThe red distance warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning chime sound.
앫You are gaining too rapidly on the ve-
hicle ahead of you.
앫The distance warning system has
recognized a stationary obstacle on
your probable line of travel.
왘Apply the brakes immediately.
왘Carefully observe the traffic situation. You
may need to brake or maneuver to avoid
hitting an obstacle.
WThe yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp comes on while
driving.
The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
왘Refuel at the next gas station
(컄page 283).
<The red seat belt telltale comes
on for a maximum of 6 seconds
after starting the engine.
The seat belt telltale reminds you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts before driving off.
왘Fasten your seat belts.
Regardless of whether the seat belts are
fastened or not, the seat belt telltale al-
ways comes on and remains lit for
6 seconds after starting the engine.
<You hear a warning chime for a
maximum of 6 seconds after
starting the engine.
You have forgotten to fasten your seat
belt.
왘Fasten your seat belt.
The warning chime stops sounding.
349
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
<The red seat belt telltale comes
on while the vehicle is standing
still and the engine is running or
during driving.
You and/or your front passenger have for-
gotten to fasten your seat belts.
왘Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
There are items placed on the front passen-
ger seat and therefore the system senses the
front passenger seat as being occupied.
왘Remove the items from the front pas-
senger seat and put them in a safe
place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
<During driving the red seat belt
telltale flashes and you addition-
ally hear an intermittent warning
chime with increasing intensity.
The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph
(25 km/h) and you and/or your front pas-
senger have forgotten to fasten your seat
belts.
왘Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
There are items placed on the front passen-
ger seat and therefore the system senses the
front passenger seat as being occupied.
왘Remove the items from the front pas-
senger seat and put them in a safe
place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
iAfter 60 seconds with an unfastened seat
belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The
seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
driver’s and the front passenger’s seat belt are
fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a
front door is opened.
350
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
1The red SRS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
There is a malfunction in the restraint sys-
tems. The air bags or emergency tensioning
devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
왘Drive with added caution to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
not be activated when needed in an acci-
dent, which could result in serious or fatal
injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in an
accident and/or injury to you or to others.
351
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
H(USA only)
Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction tell-
tale for the TPMS illuminates
continuously.
(Canada only)
Low tire pressure telltale for the
Advanced TPMS* illuminates
continuously.
The TPMS (USA only) or Advanced TPMS*
(Canada only) detects a loss of pressure in at
least one tire.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers. Observe the traffic situa-
tion around you.
왘Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display (컄page 356).
If the tire inflation pressure in the respec-
tive tire(s) has (have) been corrected, the
combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale goes out after few
minutes driving.
H(USA only)
Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction tell-
tale for the TPMS flashes for
60 seconds and then stays illu-
minated.
There is a malfunction in the TPMS. 왘Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display (컄page 356).
왘Have the TPMS checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
After the malfunction has been remedied
the combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale goes out after few
minutes driving.
352
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significant-
ly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-
er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the mal-
function indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of in-
compatible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
353
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
(USA only)
75
The indicator lamp illuminates and remains
illuminated with the weight of a typical adult
or someone larger than a small individual on
the front passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning. 왘Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display and follow cor-
rective steps (컄page 356).
Warning! G
If the 75 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
than a small individual on the front passen-
ger seat, do not have any passenger use the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
354
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
(USA only)
75
The indicator lamp does not illuminate
and/or does not remain illuminated
with the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint or less on the front passenger
seat.
The system is malfunctioning. 왘Make sure that there is nothing between seat cush-
ion and child seat and check installation of the child
seat.
왘Make sure that no objects applying supplemental
weight onto the seat are present.
왘Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, brief-
cases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head
restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system
may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
왘If the light remains out, have the system checked as
soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. Do not transport a child on the front passen-
ger seat until the system has been repaired.
왘Read and observe messages in the multifunction
display and follow corrective steps (컄page 356).
Warning! G
If the 75 indicator lamp does
not illuminate or remains out with the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child
in a standard child restraint or less on the
front passenger seat, do not transport a
child on the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired.
355
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution
(Canada only)
75
The indicator lamp illu-
minates and remains
illuminated
(컄page 76).
A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on
the passenger seat. Therefore the passen-
ger front air bag is switched off.
The system is malfunctioning when there
is no BabySmartTM child seat installed on
the passenger seat.
왘Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
The indicator lamp
does not illuminate or
does not remain illumi-
nated with a
BabySmartTM child seat
properly installed on
the passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning. 왘Make sure there is nothing between
seat cushion and child seat.
왘Check installation of the child seat
(컄page 87).
If the passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp remains out:
왘Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to
transport children on the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
356
Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the multi-
function display
Warning and malfunction messages ap-
pear in the multifunction display located in
the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messag-
es are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(컄page 141) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄page 26) or
button j, k, è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and mes-
sages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button or button j,
k, è or ÿ on the multifunction
steering wheel. They are then stored in the
vehicle status message memory
(컄page 153). Remember that clearing a
message will only make the message
disappear. Clearing a message will not
correct the condition that caused the mes-
sage to appear.
Warning! G
All categories of messages contain impor-
tant information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated,
addressed as soon as possible at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
age or personal injury.
357
Practical hints
What to do if …
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may ap-
pear in the multifunction display.
For your convenience the messages are
divided into two sections:
앫Text messages (컄page 358)
앫Symbol messages (컄page 370)
Warning! G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-
play is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
mation about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warn-
ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
iSwitching on the ignition causes all
instrument cluster lamps (except high beam
headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica-
tor lamps unless activated) as well as the multi-
function display to come on. Make sure the
lamps and multifunction display are in working
order before starting your journey.
358
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
ABS
ABS, ESP
inoperative
See Operator’s Man.
ABS, ESP® as well as PRE-SAFE® have
switched off due to a malfunction.
BAS is also switched off.
The brake system is still functioning nor-
mally but without the ABS, BAS, ESP® and
PRE-SAFE® available.
왘Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
will lock during hard braking, reducing steering
capability.
왘Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
ABS
ABS, ESP
unavailable
See Operator’s Man.
ABS, ESP® as well as PRE-SAFE® are not
available due to a malfunction. BAS is also
switched off. The system’s self-diagnosis
may not be completed yet.
The brake system is still functioning nor-
mally but without ABS, BAS, ESP® and
PRE-SAFE® available.
왘Drive a short distance with gentle turns above
a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
The message disappears when ABS, BAS, ESP®
and PRE-SAFE® are again available.
If the message does not disappear:
왘Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
will lock during hard braking, reducing steering
capability.
왘Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
359
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
ABS
ABS, ESP
unavailable
See Operator’s Man.
The ABS, ESP® as well as PRE-SAFE® were
deactivated because of insufficient power
supply. The charging voltage has fallen be-
low 10 volts.
The brake system still functions normally
but without the ABS, ESP® and PRE-SAFE®
available.
When the voltage is above this value again, the
ABS, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are operational again
and the message in the multifunction display
should disappear.
If the message in the multifunction display does
not disappear:
왘Have the generator (alternator) and the battery
checked.
Cruise
control
--- mph
(USA only)
--- km/h
(Canada only)
You have tried to switch on cruise control
below a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h).
왘Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and save
the speed.
Distronic
--- mph
(USA only)
--- km/h
(Canada only)
You have tried to switch on Distronic be-
low a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h).
왘Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and save
the speed.
inoperative
The Distronic* is malfunctioning or the
display is malfunctioning.
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
360
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Distronic
currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
Distronic* is switched off and is tempo-
rarily unavailable.
Distronic* is deactivated if:
앫the Distronic* cover in the radiator
grille is dirty
앫its function is impaired by heavy pre-
cipitation or fog
왘If necessary, clean the Distronic* cover in the
area of the radiator grille (컄page 336).
왘Restart the vehicle.
or
Distronic* becomes operational again without the
engine being restarted when:
앫dirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while
driving (e.g. slush or snow)
앫the system recognizes full sensor availability
(due to lessening rain or the road surface dry-
ing)
앫the message in the multifunction display disap-
pears
앫the speed last stored flashes in the display for
5 seconds.
You can operate Distronic* as usual again.
361
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Distronic
currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
Distronic* is deactivated because the
functionality is impaired by external in-
terferences, e.g. high-frequency sources
such as too stations, speed measuring
systems etc.
왘Leave the area of the external interference.
왘Activate Distronic* again (컄page 223) when
the message
DISTRONIC available
again ap-
pears.
Distronic* is deactivated because the
Distronic* sensor has not sensed any
other vehicles or objects, e.g. road sign
or such, for a long time.
왘Activate Distronic* again (컄page 223) when
the message
DISTRONIC available
again ap-
pears.
ESP
inoperative
See Operator’s Man.
The ESP® as well as BAS and PRE-SAFE®
have detected a malfunction and
switched off.
The ABS may not be operational.
The brake system is still functioning nor-
mally but without the ABS, BAS, ESP®
and PRE-SAFE® available.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
!When synchronizing the ESP®, make sure
you can turn the steering wheel in both direc-
tions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting
any objects, e.g. a road curb.
362
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/conse-
quence
Possible solution
(USA only)
Front passenger
airbag enabled
See Operator’s Manual
Front passenger front air bag is
activated while driving even
though a child, small individual,
or object below the system’s
weight threshold is on the front
passenger seat, or the front
passenger seat is empty. Ob-
jects on the seat or forces act-
ing on the seat may make the
system sense supplemental
weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the
front passenger seat for the following:
왘Apply the parking brake.
왘Switch off the ignition (컄page 38).
왘Open the front passenger door.
왘Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and
properly secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint
if necessary.
왘Remove any other items from on and around the front passenger
seat and make sure the storage pocket on the back of the front pas-
senger seat is empty.
왘Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind
or around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The
system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight and
sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a greater
weight than actually present.
왘Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and turn
on the ignition (컄page 38).
(Continued on next page)
363
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/con-
sequence
Possible solution
Monitor the 75 indicator lamp on the center console (컄page 29) and
the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄page 27) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫the 75 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄page 71) has deactivated the
front passenger front air bag.
앫the message
Front passenger airbag enabled See Operator’s Manual
or the
message
Front passenger airbag disabled See Operator’s Manual
should
not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait
at least 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and
to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. De-
pending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄page 71), the
75 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
If the 75 indicator lamp
remains out even after performing the above
corrective steps, do not have any children
12 years old and under and other small
individuals use the front passenger seat un-
til the system has been repaired.
364
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/conse-
quence
Possible solution
(USA only)
Front passenger
airbag disabled
See Operator’s Manual
Front passenger front air bag is
deactivated while driving even
though an adult or someone
larger than a small individual is
occupying the front passenger
seat. Forces acting on the seat
may make the system sense a
decrease in weight.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the
front passenger seat for the following:
왘Switch off the ignition (컄page 60).
왘Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
왘Adjust the seat in a height position (컄page 42).
왘Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged under-
neath, behind or around the seat). Such forces may cause the sys-
tem to sense that an occupant of a lesser weight than actually
present is on the front passenger seat.
왘Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and turn
on the ignition (컄page 38).
(Continued on next page)
365
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/con-
sequence
Possible solution
Monitor the 75 indicator lamp on the center console (컄page 29) and
the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄page 26) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫the 75 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄page 71) has deactivated the
front passenger front air bag.
앫the message
Front passenger airbag enabled See Operator’s Manual
or the
message
Front passenger airbag disabled See Operator’s Manual
should
not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait
at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and
to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. De-
pending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄page 71), the
75 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
If the 75 indicator lamp
remains illuminated with an adult occupant
on the front passenger seat even after per-
forming the above corrective steps,
do not have any passenger use the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
366
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
P
Gear selector lever
in Park position
You have tried to start the engine
with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button with the gear selector lever
not in position P.
왘Place the gear selector lever in position P.
You have tried to turn off the engine
with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button with the gear selector lever
not in position P.
P/N
Shift gear select. lever
to Neutral or Park
You have tried to start the engine
with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button while the gear selector lever
was in position R or D.
왘Place the gear selector lever in position P
or N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.
PRE-SAFE
inoperative
See Operator’s Man.
PRE-SAFE® itself has failed. All other
occupant safety systems, such as
the air bags, are still available.
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
367
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Run Flat Indicator
inactive
Canada only:
Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning.
왘Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Check tires
Then reactivate
Run Flat Indicator
Canada only:
There was a warning message about
a loss in the tire inflation pressure
and the Run Flat Indicator has not
been reactivated yet.
왘Make sure that the correct tire inflation pres-
sure is set for each tire.
왘Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator.
Run Flat Indicator
unavailable
Canada only:
The Run Flat Indicator* has been
switched off due to an error.
왘Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure
Check tires
Canada only:
The Run Flat Indicator indicates that
the pressure is too low in one or
more tires.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Ob-
serve the traffic situation around you.
왘Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as
required (컄page 302).
왘If necessary, change the wheel (컄page 412).
왘Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjust-
ing the tire inflation pressure values
(컄page 305).
368
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Tire pressure
displayed only
after driving a
few minutes
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The tire inflation pressure is being
checked.
왘Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
Tire pres. monitor
currently unavailable
The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is un-
able to monitor the tire pressure due
to
앫a nearby radio interference
source
앫excessive wheel sensor temper-
atures
왘As soon as the causes for the malfunction are
no longer present, the Advanced TPMS* auto-
matically becomes active again after a few
minutes driving.
Tire pres. monitor
inoperative
The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is
malfunctioning.
왘Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
369
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Tire pres. monitor
inoperative
No wheel sensors
There are wheels without appropri-
ate wheel sensors mounted (e.g.
winter tires).
왘Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘Have the wheel sensors installed by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pres. monitor
Wheel sensor missing
앫One or more sensors malfunc-
tion (e.g. battery is empty).
앫One or more wheels without ap-
propriate wheel sensors mount-
ed (e.g. spare tire).
The tire inflation pressure for the re-
spective tire is not shown in the mul-
tifunction display.
왘Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
왘Have the wheel sensors installed by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The tire pressure for the respective tire is
shown in the multifunction display.
370
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
V You are driving with one or more doors
open.
왘Close the doors.
YYou are driving with the hood open. 왘Close the hood (컄page 286).
Ê This message will appear whenever the
trunk is open.
왘Close the trunk.
#The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
앫alternator malfunctioning
앫broken poly-V-belt
Do not forget that the brake system
requires electrical energy and may be
operating with restricted capability.
Considerably greater brake pedal force is
required and the stopping distance is
increased.
왘Stop immediately in a safe location or
as soon as it is safe to do so and
check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may re-
sult in damage to the engine. Notify
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘Drive immediately to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Adjust driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.
371
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
#There is a malfunction in the electronic
system.
왘Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
#
Battery/Alternator
Stop vehicle
The battery is malfunctioning.
The brake system requires electrical en-
ergy and therefore has only limited oper-
ation. Considerably greater brake pedal
force is required and the stopping dis-
tance is increased.
왘Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Adjust driving to be consis-
tent with reduced braking responsive-
ness.
왘Call Roadside Assistance.
왘Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
#
Low voltage
Start engine
The battery has insufficient voltage. 왘Start the engine (컄page 51).
2
Brakepad wear
The brake pads have reached their wear
limit.
왘Have the brake pads replaced as soon
as possible.
!Brake pad thickness must be visually in-
spected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
372
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
(USA only)
;
(Canada only)
!
Release parking
brake
You are driving with the parking brake
set.
왘Release the parking brake
(컄page 53).
(USA only)
;
(Canada only)
3
EBV, ABS, ESP
inoperative
See Operator’s Man.
ABS, ESP®, EBP as well as PRE-SAFE®
have switched off due to a malfunction.
BAS is also switched off.
The brake system is still functioning nor-
mally but without the ABS, BAS, ESP® and
PRE-SAFE® available.
왘Continue driving with added caution.
왘Adjust driving to be consistent with
reduced braking responsiveness.
왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
(USA only)
;
(Canada only)
3
Check
brake fluid level
There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.
왘Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a
safe location and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
Warning! G
Driving with the messages
Check brake
fluid level
displayed can result in an ac-
cident. Have your brake system checked im-
mediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid res-
ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
!If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
373
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
(USA only)
ú
(Canada only)
±
Visit workshop
There may be a malfunction in the:
앫fuel injection system
앫ignition system
앫exhaust system
앫fuel system
왘Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
H
Top up coolant
See Operator’s Manual
The coolant level is too low. 왘Add coolant (컄page 290).
왘If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
!Do not ignore the low engine coolant level
warning. Extended driving with the message and
symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
ited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant
in the cooling system. The engine will overheat
causing major engine damage.
374
Practical hints
What to do if …
During severe operation conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Z
Coolant
Stop, turn engine off
The coolant is too hot. 왘Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so and immediately turn
off the engine.
왘Only start the engine again after the mes-
sage disappears. You could otherwise dam-
age the engine.
왘Apply the parking brake (컄page 53).
왘Observe the coolant temperature indicator
in the instrument cluster (컄page 26).
If the temperature rises again:
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately.
Warning! G
Driving when your engine is badly overheat-
ed can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
!The engine should not be operated with the
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
375
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Z
Coolant
Stop, turn engine off
The poly-V-belt could be broken. 왘Stop the vehicle in a safe location and immediately
turn off the engine.
왘Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will
overheat due to an inoperative water pump which
may result in damage to the engine. Notify an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is intact:
왘Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this mes-
sage displayed. Doing so could result in serious en-
gine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Warranty.
왘Observe the coolant temperature indicator in the
instrument cluster (컄page 26).
왘Drive immediately to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
376
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Z The cooling fan for the coolant is
malfunctioning.
왘Observe the coolant temperature indicator in the
instrument cluster (컄page 26).
If the coolant temperature is under 120°C, you may
continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
왘Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by
driving uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
왘Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
±
Display malfunction
Visit workshop
Certain electronic systems are
unable to relay information to
the control system. The follow-
ing systems may have failed:
앫Coolant temperature display
앫Tachometer
앫Cruise control display
왘Have the electronic systems checked by an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Engine
Service
There may be a malfunction in:
앫the fuel injection system
앫the ignition system
앫the exhaust system
왘Have the engine checked as soon as possible by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
377
Practical hints
What to do if …
When the
Check oil level - at next re-
fueling
message appears while the en-
gine is running and at operating
temperature, the engine oil level has
dropped to approximately the minimum
level.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
If no oil leaks are noted, continue to drive
to the nearest service station where the
engine oil should be topped to the required
level with an approved engine oil.
For information on approved engine oils,
refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
:
Check oil level
at next refueling
There is no oil in the engine. There is
a danger of engine damage.
왘Check the engine oil level (컄page 288) and
add engine oil as required (컄page 289).
왘If you must add engine oil frequently, have
the engine checked for possible leaks.
!The engine oil level warnings should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol dis-
played could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limit-
ed Warranty.
378
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
A
Reserve fuel
The fuel level has dropped below the re-
serve mark.
왘Refuel at the next gas station
(컄page 283).
Gas cap is open
A loss of pressure has been detected in
the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be
closed properly or the fuel system may be
leaky.
왘Check the fuel cap (컄page 283).
If it is not closed properly:
왘Close the fuel cap.
If it is closed properly:
왘Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
»
Replace air cleaner
The air cleaner is clogged. 왘Have the air cleaner checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
F
Remove key
You have forgotten to remove the
SmartKey.
왘Remove the SmartKey from the start-
er switch.
F
Get a new key
The SmartKey is malfunctioning. 왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
F
Key
still in vehicle
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* left in the
vehicle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.
왘Take the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* out of the vehicle.
379
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
F
Please don't
forget your key
This display appears (for a maximum of
60 seconds) if the driver’s door is opened
with the engine turned off and no
SmartKey in the starter switch.
This message is only a reminder.
왘Take the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you when leaving
the vehicle.
Change
key batteries
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batter-
ies are discharged.
왘Replace the batteries (컄page 402).
Key
not recognized
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not
recognized while the engine is running
because
앫the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
not in the vehicle
앫there is strong radio-frequency inter-
ference
왘Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
왘Search for the SmartKey.
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be cen-
trally locked nor can the engine be
started again after the engine is
stopped.
Key
not recognized
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo-
mentarily not recognized.
왘Change the position of the SmartKey
in the vehicle.
왘Operate the vehicle with the
SmartKey in the starter switch if nec-
essary.
380
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
F
Change
key batteries
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* batter-
ies are discharged.
왘Replace the batteries (컄page 402).
Key
not detected
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is not
recognized while the engine is running
because
앫the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
not in the vehicle
앫there is strong radio-frequency inter-
ference
왘Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so.
왘Search for the SmartKey.
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be cen-
trally locked nor can the engine be
started again after the engine is
stopped.
Key
not detected
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is mo-
mentarily not recognized.
왘Change the position of the SmartKey in
the vehicle.
왘Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey
in the starter switch if necessary.
.
Active headlamps
inoperative
The active Bi-Xenon* headlamp system is
malfunctioning.
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Active headlamps
The active Bi-Xenon* headlamps are mal-
functioning.
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
381
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
Reverse lamp
left side
The left reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Reverse lamp
right side
The right reverse lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Brake-/tail lamp, left
Auxiliary bulb on
The left brake/tail lamp is malfunction-
ing.
This message will only appear if a critical
number of LEDs have stopped working.
An auxiliary bulb is being used.
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Brake-/tail lamp, right
Auxiliary bulb on
The right brake/tail lamp is malfunction-
ing.
This message will only appear if a critical
number of LEDs have stopped working.
An auxiliary bulb is being used.
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
3rd brake lamp
The high mounted brake lamp is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Front foglamp
left side
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Front foglamp
right side
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
382
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
Front left
marker lamp
The front left side marker lamp is mal-
functioning.
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Front right
marker lamp
The front right side marker lamp is mal-
functioning.
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Front left park. lamp
Auxiliary bulb on
The left front parking lamp is malfunction-
ing. An auxiliary bulb is being used.
Halogen headlamp:
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄page 404).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Front right park. lamp
Auxiliary bulb on
The right front parking lamp is malfunc-
tioning. An auxiliary bulb is being used.
Halogen headlamp:
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄page 404).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
High beam
left side
The left high beam lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄page 404).
High beam
right side
The right high beam lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄page 404).
383
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
License plate lamp
left side
The left license plate lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄page 404).
License plate lamp
right side
The right license plate lamp is malfunc-
tioning.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄page 404).
AUTO-Light
inoperative
The light sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps switch on automatically.
왘In the control system, set lamp opera-
tion to manual mode (컄page 161).
왘Switch on headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch.
Low beam
left side
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Halogen headlamp:
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄page 404).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Low beam
right side
The right low beam lamp is malfunction-
ing.
Halogen headlamp:
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
384
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
Rear left foglamp
The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Rear right foglamp
The right rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. 왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Switch off lights
You have removed the SmartKey from the
starter switch, opened the driver’s door and
left the headlamps on or removed the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* from the vehi-
cle and left the headlamps on.
왘Switch off the headlamps.
Switch off lights
or
remove key
The exterior lamp switch is set to U and
you have forgotten to take out the SmartKey.
The parking lamps remain switched on.
왘Switch off the headlamps
(컄page 128).
or
왘Remove the SmartKey from the start-
er switch.
Tail lamp, left side
Auxiliary bulb on
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. An auxilia-
ry bulb is being used.
왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Tail lamp, right side
Auxiliary bulb on
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. An auxil-
iary bulb is being used.
왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
385
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
Cornering lamp
left
The left corner-illuminating front fog lamp* is
malfunctioning.
왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Cornering lamp
right
The right corner-illuminating front fog lamp*
is malfunctioning.
왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Rear right left signal
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Rear right turn signal
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Front left turn signal
The left front turn signal lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄page 404).
Front right turn signal
The right front turn signal lamp is malfunction-
ing.
왘Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄page 404).
Left mirror
turn signal
The turn signal in the left exterior rear view
mirror is malfunctioning. This message will
only appear if a critical number of LEDs have
stopped working.
왘Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
386
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
Right mirror
turn signal
The turn signal in the right exterior rear
view mirror is malfunctioning. This mes-
sage will only appear if a critical number of
LEDs have stopped working.
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
L
Tele Aid
inoperative
One or more main functions of the
Tele Aid system are malfunctioning.
왘Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tele Aid
battery
The emergency power battery for the
Tele Aid system is malfunctioning. If the
vehicle battery is also dead, Tele Aid will
not be operational.
왘Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1
Restraint system
malfunction
Visit workshop
The system is malfunctioning. 왘Drive with added caution to the near-
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately
to have the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not be activated when needed in
an accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
387
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
H
Caution
Tire defect
One or more tires are deflating.
The respective tire is shown in the
multifunction display.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘If necessary, change the wheel (컄page 412).
왘Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Check tires
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The tire pressure in one or more tires
is already below the minimum value.
The respective tire is shown in the
multifunction display.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
왘If necessary, change the wheel (컄page 412).
왘Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
388
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
H
Please rectify
tire pressure
The pressure is too low in one or more
tires.
왘Check and correct tire inflation pressure as
required (컄page 302).
Tire pressure
Caution, tire defect
One or more tires are deflating. 왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘If necessary, change the wheel (컄page 412).
왘Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire pressure
Check tires
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The tire pressure in one or more tires
is already below the minimum value.
왘Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
왘If necessary, change the wheel (컄page 412).
왘Have the damaged wheel repaired or replaced
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
389
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
t
Function
unavailable
This display appears if button t or
s on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
W
Top up
washer fluid
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of
total reservoir capacity.
왘Add washer fluid (컄page 292).
@
Vehicle rising
Your vehicle is adjusting to your level se-
lection.
Vehicle rising
Please wait
The vehicle level is too low. 왘Do not drive off.
The Airmatic has not yet adjusted the
vehicle level to the necessary height
required for driving.
왘Wait until the message disappears
from the multifunction display.
You may then drive off.
390
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
@
STOP, car too low
The Airmatic* is malfunctioning. Avoid excessive steering input. The fender
or tires could otherwise be damaged. Lis-
ten for scraping noises.
왘Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘Drive to the side of the road and select
a higher vehicle level (컄page 232).
Depending on the type of malfunction,
this may raise the vehicle’s level.
왘Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
Malfunction
The system display or the system is mal-
functioning.
The system is functional only to a limited
extent.
왘Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘Have the vehicle checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
391
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
왔Where will I find...?
First aid kit
The first aid kit is in the storage compart-
ment at the front edge of the front passen-
ger seat.
1Tab
왘Pull tab 1 upward.
왘Fold the covering forward.
왘Remove the first aid kit.
Spare wheel
The spare wheel is located under the trunk
floor.
왘Lift the trunk floor and engage the han-
dle in the upper edge of trunk.
왘Remove the luggage box (컄page 395).
Minispare wheel (CLS 550 only)
1Vehicle tool kit
2Minispare wheel
3Luggage bowl
Removing the Minispare wheel
왘Turn luggage bowl 3 counterclock-
wise.
왘Remove Minispare wheel 2.
Storing the Minispare wheel after use
왘Place Minispare wheel 2 in wheel
well.
왘Turn luggage bowl clockwise to its stop
to secure the Minispare wheel.
iCheck expiration dates and contents for
completeness at least once a year and replace
missing/expired items.
!Always lower trunk floor before closing the
trunk.
392
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
Collapsible tire (CLS 63 AMG only)
1Vehicle tool kit
2Collapsible tire
3Electric air pump
4Storage well casing
Removing the collapsible tire
왘Remove storage well casing that con-
tains the vehicle tool kit and the elec-
tric air pump.
1Collapsible tire
2Tensioning strap
(vehicles with 19" collapsible tire only)
3Retaining screw
4Storage well casing base
5Tensioning strap
(vehicles with 19" collapsible tire only)
왘Remove storage well casing base 4.
왘Remove retaining screw 3 by turning
it counterclockwise.
왘Remove collapsible tire 1.
Storing the collapsible tire after use
If you wish to store the collapsible tire after
use, carry out the following steps. Other-
wise, the collapsible tire may not fit the
spare wheel well.
왘Unscrew the valve cap from the valve
of the collapsible tire.
왘Take the valve extractor from the
vehicle tool kit (컄page 393).
왘Unscrew the valve insert from the valve
and allow the air to escape.
왘Screw the valve insert back into the
valve.
왘Screw the valve cap back onto the
valve.
!Make sure the collapsible tire is dry before
storing it.
iIt may take a few minutes for the collapsible
tire to deflate completely.
393
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
왘Store the collapsible tire by carrying
out the steps described in “Removing
the collapsible tire” (컄page 392) in re-
verse order.
Compressing the collapsible tire
(CLS 63 AMG with Performance Pack-
age* only)
The 19" collapsible tire must be com-
pressed with two tensioning straps before
you can store it back in the trunk.
왘Extend the tensioning strap by pulling
the slider.
왘Place tensioning strap around spare
wheel rim and collapsible tire with the
buckle facing the inside of the rim.
왘Close the buckle.
왘Pull the loose end of the tensioning
strap.
The tensioning strap must be pulled as
tight as possible.
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is stored in the com-
partment underneath the trunk floor
(컄page 391).
The vehicle tool kit includes:
앫One pair of universal pliers
앫One towing eye bolt
앫One wheel wrench
앫One alignment bolt
앫One fuse extractor
앫One collapsible wheel chock
앫Spare fuses
iVehicles with 19" collapsible tire only: Be-
fore storing the collapsible tire in trunk fasten
tensioning straps, see “Compressing the col-
lapsible tire (CLS 63 AMG with Performance
Package* only)” (컄page 393).
!Always lower trunk floor before closing the
trunk.
iThe electrical air pump is located in the stor-
age well casing (컄page 392).
iThe tensioning straps are shown in red for
illustration purposes. The tensioning straps on
the spare wheel of your vehicle are black.
394
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located in the storage
compartment underneath the trunk floor.
Storage position
왘Remove vehicle jack from its
compartment.
왘Turn crank handle in direction of arrow
as far as it will go.
Operational position
왘Turn crank handle clockwise.
Before storing the vehicle jack in its com-
partment:
앫It should be fully collapsed.
앫The handle must be folded in (storage
position).
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on a level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
395
Practical hints
Where will I find...?
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock
The collapsible wheel chock serves to
additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
changing the wheel.
1Tilt the plate upward
2Fold the lower plate outward
3Insert the plate
왘Tilt both plates upward 1.
왘Fold the lower plate outward 2.
왘Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the
way into the openings of the base
plate 3.
For information on where to place wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lift-
ing the vehicle” (컄page 413).
Luggage box
Remove luggage box
1Fastening clip
2Luggage box
왘Turn fastening clips 1 to the left up-
wards from fastening bolts.
왘Lift luggage box in the area of the fas-
tening bolts and remove it from trunk.
Install luggage box
왘Insert luggage box into trunk so that
fastening clips are in line with fastening
bolts.
왘Push front edge of luggage box in direc-
tion of arrow under cover of trunk sill.
왘Press fastening clips onto fastening
bolts until they lock into place.
396
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, unlock the
driver’s door and the trunk using the me-
chanical key.
Removing the mechanical key
1Mechanical key locking tab
2Mechanical key
왘Move locking tab 1 in direction of ar-
row.
왘Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
housing.
Unlocking the driver’s door
왘Insert mechanical key 2 into the driv-
er’s door lock until it stops.
왘Turn mechanical key 2 counterclock-
wise to position 1 until the locking
knob moves up.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
왘Pull the door handle to open the driv-
er’s door.
iUnlocking your vehicle with the mechanical
key and opening the driver’s door or the trunk
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, Insert the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* in the starter
switch. 1Unlocking
2Mechanical key
397
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the trunk
A minimum height clearance of 5.90 ft
(1.80 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
왘Insert the mechanical key into the
trunk lid lock until it stops.
왘Turn the mechanical key 1 counter-
clockwise to position 3 and hold it in
this position.
왘Pull the handle 2 and lift the trunk lid.
The trunk opens.
왘Turn the mechanical key back and re-
move it from the trunk lid lock.
Locking the vehicle
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*, do the following:
왘Close the passenger door, the rear
doors and the trunk.
왘Press the central locking switch in the
center console (컄page 118).
왘Check to see whether the locking
knobs on the doors have moved down.
왘If necessary, push them down
manually.
왘Remove the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄page 396).
왘Check whether the trunk is locked.
왘If necessary, lock the trunk with the
mechanical key (컄page 117).
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle
should now be locked.
1Mechanical key
2Handle
3Unlocking in an emergency
!Always make sure there is sufficient over-
head clearance.
컄컄
398
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왘Insert the mechanical key 2 into the
driver’s door lock until it stops.
왘Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 1.
The driver’s door is locked.
Fuel filler flap emergency release
In case the central locking system does
not release the fuel filler flap, you can open
it manually.
1Release knob
왘Open trunk.
왘Remove right-side tail trim.
왘Pull release knob 1 in the direction of
arrow.
The fuel filler flap can know be opened.
Manually unlocking the gear selector
lever
In case of power failure, the gear selector
lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow
the vehicle.
1Selector lever cover
2Release
1Locking
2Mechanical key
iThis procedure does not arm the anti-theft
alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel filler flap.
컄컄
399
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왘Insert flat, blunt object (e.g. screwdriv-
er) into the left edge of cover 1 at the
position indicated by the arrows.
왘Loosen cover 1 using this object.
왘Using your hands, pull cover 1 out
and remove.
왘Push down and hold release 2 in
direction of arrow.
왘Simultaneously move gear selector
lever out of position P.
The gear selector lever is unlocked
now.
iThe gear selector lever is locked again as
soon as you place it in position P again.
400
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
You can open or close the tilt/sliding sun-
roof manually should an electrical malfunc-
tion occur.
The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located be-
hind lens 1 of the interior overhead light.
1Cover
왘Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘Press on cover 1 in direction of the
arrow to release it.
2Hole
3Crank
왘Take crank 3 out of the glove box.
왘Insert crank 3 through hole 2.
왘Turn crank 3 clockwise to:
앫slide roof panel/sunroof closed
앫raise roof panel/sunroof at the rear
왘Turn crank 3 counterclockwise to:
앫slide roof panel/sunroof open
앫lower roof panel/sunroof at the
rear
iTurn crank 3 slowly and smoothly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized af-
ter being operated manually (컄page 214).
401
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
왔Resetting activated head restraints
If the active head restraint have been trig-
gered in an accident, the head restraints
must be reset. Otherwise, active head re-
straint cannot offer any additional protec-
tion in the event of another rear-end
collision.
You can tell that the head restraints have
been activated when they have been
moved forward and cannot be adjusted.
왘Take the reset tool out of the
Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.
왘Guide reset tool into center of head re-
straint between head restraint cushion
and rear head restraint cover.
왘Press reset tool forward in direction of
arrow.
왘Press reset tool downward until you
hear the head restraint release
mechanism audibly engage.
왘Pull out reset tool.
왘Firmly press head restraint cushion
backward towards rear head restraint
cover until it engages.
왘Repeat this procedure for second head
restraint.
For information on head restraint adjust-
ment, see “Seats” (컄page 41).
iFor your convenience, we recommend that
you have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You will find the reset tool for manually operating
the head restraints in the Mercedes-Benz vehicle
literature pouch.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, have the active head re-
straints checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end colli-
sion.
!Be careful not to damage upholstery.
Warning! G
When pushing back the head restraint cush-
ion, take care that your fingers do not be-
come caught between the head restraint
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
lead to injury.
402
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey/SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged, the ve-
hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked.
It is recommended to have the batteries re-
placed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘Remove the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* (컄page 396).
1Mechanical key
2Battery compartment
왘Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.
왘Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
arrow.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
Warning! G
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore keep the batteries
out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
iWhen inserting the batteries, make sure
they are clean and free of lint.
iWhen changing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are available
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
403
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
왘Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
housing.
3Batteries
4Contact springs
왘Pull out batteries 3.
왘Using a line-free cloth, insert new bat-
teries 3 under contact springs 4 with
the positive terminal (+) side facing up.
왘Return battery compartment 2
(컄page 402) into housing until it locks
into place.
왘Slide the mechanical key back into the
SmartKey/SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
왘Check the operation of the SmartKey/
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
404
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there-
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
semblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
iIf the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of high humid-
ity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights
on should clear up the fogging.
iAuxiliary bulbs will be brought into use when
lamps malfunction. Read and observe the mes-
sages in the multifunction display (컄page 380).
405
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp Type
1Additional turn signal
lamps
LED
2Turn signal lamp 3457 AK
3Halogen headlamps:
Low beam
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
Low and high beam1
1Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low beam
and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do
not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
H7 (55 W)
D2S-35 W
4Side marker lamp W 5 W
Lamp Type
5Halogen headlamps:
High beam/high beam
flasher
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
High beam flasher
H7 (55 W)
H7 (55 W)
Halogen headlamps:
Parking and standing
lamp
Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
Parking an standing
lamp
W 5 W
Blue Vision
LED
6Front fog lamp
Corner-illuminating
front fog lamp*
H11 (55 W)
H11 (55 W)
406
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Notes on bulb replacement
앫Use only 12 volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
앫Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫If the newly installed bulb does not light
up, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Lamp Type
7High mounted brake
lamp
LED
8 Brake, tail, parking,
standing, backup lamps
and turn signal lamps.
Rear fog lamp
HiP
LED*
9License plate lamps C5W
Warning! G
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Al-
low the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
앫touch or move it when hot
앫drop the bulb
앫scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
407
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center:
앫Additional turn signals in the exterior
rear view mirrors
앫High mounted brake lamp
앫Bi-Xenon* lamps
앫Front fog lamps
앫Front side marker lamps
앫Parking and standing lamps (vehicles
with Bi-Xenon* headlamps only)
앫Rear lamps (except license plate
lamps)
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
1Housing cover for low beam halogen or
Bi-Xenon* headlamp
2Housing cover for high beam head-
lamp/high beam flasher bulb and for
parking and standing lamp bulb
3Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb
4Bulb holder of high beam bulb
5Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp bulb
6Bulb holder of low beam bulb
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄page 128).
왘Open the hood (컄page 286) (except
for side marker lamps).
!Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehi-
cle. Only have the LEDs replaced by an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
Do not remove the cover 1 for the Bi-Xe-
non* headlamp. Because of high voltage in
Xenon* lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components.
We recommend that you have such work
done by a qualified technician.
408
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Low beam bulb (halogen headlamps
only)
왘Turn housing cover 1 counterclock-
wise and remove it.
왘Turn bulb holder 6 with the bulb coun-
terclockwise and remove it.
왘Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb
holder 6.
왘Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of bulb holder 6
and is level to it.
왘Reinsert bulb holder 6 with the bulb in
the lamp and turn clockwise.
왘Align housing cover 1 and turn it
clockwise.
High beam bulb/high beam flasher
bulb (halogen headlamps)/high beam
flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon* headlamps)
왘Turn housing cover 2 counterclock-
wise and remove it.
왘Turn bulb holder 4 with the bulb coun-
terclockwise and remove it.
왘Pull the bulb at its socket out of bulb
holder 4.
왘Insert the new bulb so that its socket
locates in the recess of bulb holder 4
and is level to it.
왘Reinsert bulb holder 4 with the bulb in
the lamp and turn clockwise.
왘Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.
Front turn signal lamp bulb
왘Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
왘Press gently onto the bulb and turn
counterclockwise out of bulb
socket 3.
왘Press the new bulb gently into bulb
socket 3 and turn clockwise until it
engages.
왘Place bulb socket 3 back into the
lamp and turn it clockwise.
409
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Parking and standing lamp bulb
Halogen headlamps
왘Turn housing cover 2 counterclock-
wise and remove it.
왘Pull out bulb socket 5 with the bulb.
왘Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket 5.
왘Press the new bulb into bulb socket 5.
왘Press bulb socket 5 back into the
lamp.
왘Align housing cover 2 and turn it
clockwise.
Bi-Xenon* headlamps
In vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps, the
bulbs of the parking and standing lamps
are LEDs.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp unit
The tail lamps are equipped with HiP bulbs.
License plate lamp
1License plate lamp
2Screws
왘Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄page 128).
왘Loosen both screws 2.
왘Remove the license plate lamp 1.
왘Replace the bulb.
왘Reinstall the license plate lamp 1.
왘Retighten screws 2.
!Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehi-
cle. Only have the LEDs replaced by an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Warning! G
The bulbs in the tail lamps cannot be re-
placed individually. The tail lamp bulbs are
under pressure and could explode during an
attempt to replace them.
If the tail lamps are malfunctioning, have
them exchanged at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
410
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Wiper blades 왘Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1.
왘Turn combination switch to wiper
setting U (컄page 57).
왘With wiper arms in the vertical position,
turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
Wiper blades in vertical position
왘Remove SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0.
Warning! G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
move SmartKey from starter switch (vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
Warning! G
Wiper blades are components that are sub-
ject to wear and tear. Change the wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be
able to observe surrounding traffic condi-
tions and could cause an accident.
!Never open the hood when the wiper arms
are folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the wind-
shield glass without a wiper blade inserted.
For your convenience, we recommend that you
have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
!To avoid damage to the hood the wiper arms
should only be folded forward when in the verti-
cal position.
411
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Removing wiper
왘Fold the wiper arm forward until it
snaps into place.
왘Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to
wiper arm.
왘Slide the wiper blade sideways out of
the retainer.
Installing wiper blades
왘Slide wiper blade onto wiper arm until
it locks in place.
왘Rotate wiper blade into position paral-
lel to wiper arm.
왘Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield. Make sure you hold on
to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back.
!Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear.
!Make sure that the wiper blades are proper-
ly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades
may cause windshield damage.
412
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
왘Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
when possible.
왘Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
왘Turn the steering wheel so that the
front wheels are in a straight ahead
position.
왘Set the parking brake.
왘Move the gear selector lever to P.
Vehicles with SmartKey:
왘Turn off the engine (컄page 60).
왘Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* button on the gear
selector lever once (컄page 60).
왘Open the driver’s door (this puts the
starter switch in position 0, same as
with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch). The driver’s door then
can be closed again.
왘Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Mounting the spare wheel
iOpen door only when conditions are safe to
do so.
Warning! G
The dimensions of the spare wheel
(Minispare or collapsible tire) are different
from those of the road wheels. As a result,
the vehicle handling characteristics change
when driving with a spare wheel mounted.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire pressure and do not ex-
ceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible to have the spare wheel
replaced with a regular road wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a Minis-
pare or collapsible tire is mounted.
413
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Prepare the vehicle as described under
“Preparing the vehicle” on this page.
왘Take the spare wheel out of the trunk
(컄page 391).
왘Take the wheel wrench and the jack
out of the trunk (컄page 391).
Removing tensioning straps
(CLS 63 AMG with Performance Pack-
age* only)
A 19" spare wheel has two tensioning
straps on it that must both be removed be-
fore mounting the spare wheel.
1Buckle
2Clip
왘Press on both clips 2 simultaneously
to release buckle 1.
Lifting the vehicle
왘Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
or other sizeable objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘Place the wheel chock in front of and
another sizeable object behind the
wheel that is diagonally opposite to the
wheel being changed.
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack
on a level surface. However, should cir-
cumstances require you to do so on a hill,
place the wheel chock and the other size-
able object as follows:
왘Place the wheel chock and another
sizeable object on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the axle not
being worked on.
iThe tensioning straps are shown in red for
illustration purposes. The tensioning straps on
the spare wheel of your vehicle are black.
iKeep the tensioning straps in a safe place.
You will need them to store the spare wheel in
the trunk after use (컄page 392).
414
Practical hints
Flat tire
1Wheel wrench
왘On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (ap-
proximately one full turn with
wrench 1).
The jack take-up brackets are located di-
rectly behind the front wheel housings and
in front of the rear wheel housings.
1Jack take-up bracket
2Jack
왘Place jack 2 on firm ground.
왘Position jack 2 under take-up
bracket 1 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an
incline.
Warning! G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into either side of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, es-
pecially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm is
fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Al-
ways lower the vehicle onto sufficient ca-
pacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
415
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the
ground. Never start engine while
vehicle is raised.
Removing the wheel
1Alignment bolt
왘Unscrew the upper-most wheel bolt
and remove.
왘Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the tool kit.
왘Remove the remaining bolts.
왘Remove the wheel.
Mounting the spare wheel
왘Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
왘Guide the spare wheel onto the align-
ment bolt and push it on.
왘Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
Warning! G
The jack is intended only for lifting the
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
suited for performing maintenance work
under the vehicle.
앫Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
앫Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
!Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This
could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub
threads.
Warning! G
Vehicles with collapsible tire:
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly mounted.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
pump (컄page 416) before lowering the
vehicle.
!To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first
wheel bolt.
416
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Vehicles with Minispare wheel:
왘Continue the procedure by following
the instructions under “Lowering the
vehicle” (컄page 418).
Vehicles with collapsible tire:
왘Continue the procedure by following
the instructions under “Inflating the
collapsible tire” and then “Lowering the
vehicle” (컄page 418).
Inflating the collapsible tire
왘Take the electric air pump out of the
trunk (컄page 391).
Warning! G
Always replace wheel bolts that are dam-
aged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident. Be
sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
Warning! G
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could fall off the jack.
!Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the
collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may be dam-
aged.
Warning! G
Observe instructions on air pump label.
417
Practical hints
Flat tire
1Flap
2Air pump switch
3Electrical plug
4Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
5Union nut
왘Open flap 1 on the air pump.
왘Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose
with pressure gauge 4.
왘Make sure the vent screw on air
hose 4 is closed.
왘Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
왘Screw union nut 5 onto the tire valve.
왘Insert electrical plug 3 into vehicle
cigarette lighter socket (컄page 250).
왘Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1.
or
왘Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever once
without depressing the brake pedal.
왘Press I on electric air pump switch 2.
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the tire.
왘Inflate the tire to approximately 51 psi
(3.5 bar).
This takes about 5 minutes for the col-
lapsible tire. Air hose 4 and union
nut 5 can become hot during infla-
tion. Exercise proper caution to avoid
burning yourself when using the equip-
ment.
왘Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.
왘Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0.
or
왘Press KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button
on the gear selector lever twice without
depressing the brake pedal.
The electric air pump should now be
switched off.
왘If the tire inflation pressure is above
51 psi (3.5 bar), release excess tire in-
flation pressure using the vent screw.
!Do not operate the air pump longer than
8 minutes without interruption. Otherwise it may
overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after it has
cooled off.
컄컄
418
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘Detach the electric air pump.
왘Stow electrical plug 3 and air hose 4
behind flap 1 and place the air pump
back in the trunk.
Lowering the vehicle
왘Lower vehicle by turning crank coun-
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful-
ly on its own weight.
왘Remove the jack.
1-5 Wheel bolts
왘Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-
lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-
ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm).
왘Before storing the jack in the trunk, it
should be fully collapsed.
Warning! G
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes, etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
iVehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure moni-
tor (컄page 309) until a full size wheel/tire with
functioning sensor has been placed back into
service on the vehicle.
Warning! G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
iWrap the damaged wheel in the protective
film that comes with the spare wheel and put the
wheel in the trunk.
You can also place the damaged wheel down into
the spare wheel well. In this case, you must stow
the luggage bowl in the trunk.
컄컄
419
Practical hints
Flat tire
MOExtended system*
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there
is a total loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
You may only use the MOExtended system
in conjunction with Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (U.S. vehicles), Run Flat Indica-
tor (Canada vehicles), or Advanced Tire
Pressure Monitoring System* (Canada
only).
!The maximum distance in emergency mode
depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 30 miles
(50 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and
18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded.
The point at which the maximum driving distance
begins in emergency mode is when the warning
message appears in the multifunction display
indicating that there is a loss of tire inflation
pressure.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Warning! G
In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
characteristics are diminished in such situa-
tions as:
앫driving around curves
앫while braking
앫while accelerating rapidly
Therefore, your driving style must be adapt-
ed accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and
driving maneuvers, as well as driving over
obstacles (road curbs, potholes, or off-road
areas). This is especially important if the
vehicle is heavily loaded.
The emergency driving distance that can be
achieved greatly depends on the demands
placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can
be significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is
driven cautiously, somewhat longer.
Do not continue driving in emergency mode
if
앫you notice knocking sounds
앫the vehicle starts to shake
앫smoke develops and you smell rubber
앫ESP® is intervening continuously
앫you notice tears on the tire sidewalls
After driving in emergency mode, you must
have the rims inspected by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are
suitable for further use. The failed tire must
be replaced in any case.
iWhen replacing individual or all tires on the
vehicle, make sure only matching tires marked
with “MOExtended” are mounted in the size
specified for your vehicle (컄page 444).
420
Practical hints
Battery
The battery is located on the right hand
side of the trunk under the luggage box
(컄page 395).
1Positive terminal cover
2Negative terminal
Warning! G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Warning! G
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries
(컄page 291).
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
!Depending on vehicle production date, the
battery is a Valve-Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA)
battery, also referred to as “fleece” battery.
Such batteries do not require topping-up of the
electrolyte level. VRLA batteries therefore do not
have cell caps and the battery cover is non-re-
movable. Do not attempt to open the battery as
otherwise the battery will be damaged.
Even though VRLA batteries do not require top-
ping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be
opened to check the electrolyte level, the bat-
tery condition must be checked periodically by
performing a battery conductance test. Refer to
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition test-
ing intervals.
The factory-equipped VRLA battery is
leak-proofed. Only use a battery as replacement
that has the same security features and is of
identical size, voltage, and capacity as the facto-
ry-equipped battery.
421
Practical hints
Battery
Disconnecting the battery
왘Depress parking brake firmly or move
gear selector lever to position P.
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘Press the start/stop button until
the engine shuts off.
왘Open the driver’s door.
왘Open the trunk.
왘Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄page 420).
왘Remove the luggage box (컄page 395).
왘Disconnect battery negative lead 2.
왘Remove cover 1 from the positive ter-
minal.
왘Disconnect the battery positive lead.
Removing the battery
왘Remove the screw-nuts securing the
battery.
왘Remove the battery bracket.
왘Pull out the battery ventilation tube
from the battery (depending on battery
arrangement in your vehicle model, the
battery ventilation tube is located on
the left or right side of the battery).
왘Take out the battery.
!As with any other battery, disconnect the
battery if you do not intend to operate your vehi-
cle for an extended period of time to prevent bat-
tery discharge or connect an accessory battery
charge unit expressly approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to main-
tain the battery charge. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.
The battery, the battery ventilation hose and the
lateral plug must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
!Never loosen or detach battery terminal
clamps while the engine is running or the
SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the
alternator and other electronic components
could be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly by an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance
intervals or contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.
Warning! G
With a disconnected battery
앫you will no longer be able to turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch and
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever will
have no effect
앫the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
422
Practical hints
Battery
Charging and reinstalling the battery 왘Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
왘Reinstall the charged battery. Follow
the previously described steps in re-
verse order.
Reconnecting the battery
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover.
왘Connect the negative lead.
왘Install the luggage box (컄page 395).
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12 volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Warning! G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit* approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during charg-
ing and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit* specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for infor-
mation and availability. Charge battery in
accordance with the separate instructions
for the accessory battery charger*.
!The battery, its filler caps and the battery
ventilation tube must always be securely in-
stalled when the vehicle is in operation.
!Never invert the terminal connections!
iThe following procedures must be carried
out following any interruption of battery power
(e.g. due to reconnection):
앫Set the clock (컄page 159) (see COMAND
operator’s manual).
앫Resynchronize the side windows
(컄page 209).
앫Resynchronize the tilt/sliding sunroof
(컄page 214).
423
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the bat-
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow-
ing:
앫Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic convert-
er are cold.
앫Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump start-
ing with a higher voltage battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
parts that move when the engine is
started or running.
Warning! G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
!Do not tow-start the vehicle.
!Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a bat-
tery quick charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several unsuc-
cessful starting attempts, have it checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated
failed starting attempts may damage the catalyt-
ic converter and may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any
other metal part while the other end is still at-
tached to a battery.
Warning! G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries
(컄page 291).
424
Practical hints
Jump starting
The main battery is located in the trunk un-
derneath the luggage box (컄page 395).
Only jump start the vehicle from the bat-
tery in the trunk.
왘Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Apply parking brake (컄page 59).
왘Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to position P.
왘Open the trunk.
1Positive terminal of discharged battery
2Negative terminal of discharged bat-
tery
3Positive terminal of charged battery
4Negative terminal of charged battery
왘Connect positive terminals 1 and 3
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 3
first.
왘Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
왘Connect negative terminals 4 and 2
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 4
first.
왘Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
cle.
You can now turn on the electrical con-
sumers. Do not switch on the headlamps
under any circumstances.
왘Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 2 and 4 and then
from positive terminals 1 and 3.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
왘Have the battery checked at the near-
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
!Never invert the terminal connections!
425
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the
vehicle be transported with all wheels off
the ground using flatbed or appropriate
wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is
preferable to other types of towing.
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the
vehicle may be towed with all wheels on
the ground or front wheels raised only so
far as necessary to have the vehicle moved
to a safe location where the recommended
towing methods can be employed.
!Do not tow-start the vehicle.
!Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment
with SmartKey in starter switch turned to
position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing
with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will
damage radiator and supports.
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie
down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts.
Switch off the automatic central (컄page 165)
locking.
Warning! G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫the engine will not run
앫there is a malfunction in the brake sys-
tem
앫there is a malfunction in the power sup-
ply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately con-
trol the towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
is in starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
remove SmartKey from starter switch and
reinsert.
Warning! G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the steering system. In
this case, it is important to keep in mind that
a considerably higher degree of effort is nec-
essary to steer the vehicle. Adapt your driv-
ing accordingly.
!If the vehicle is towed with the front axle
raised, the gear selector lever must be in
position N and the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1).
Active braking action through the ESP® may
otherwise seriously damage the brake system.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground, the selector lever must be in position N
and the SmartKey must be in starter switch
position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may
be towed only for distances up to 30 miles
(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
426
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
Front of vehicle
1Cover on right side of front bumper
To remove cover:
왘Press mark on cover in direction of ar-
row.
왘Lift cover off to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt.
!Towing of the vehicle should only be done
using the properly installed towing eye bolt. Nev-
er attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to the
vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.
iWhen towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, please note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and
the SmartKey in starter switch position 2, or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in position 2,
the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as
well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more.
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking
(컄page 118).
iTo signal turns while being towed with the
hazard warning flasher in use, turn SmartKey in
starter switch to position 2 and activate the
combination switch for the left or right turn
signal in the usual manner – only the selected
turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warn-
ing flasher will operate again.
iThe selector lever will remain locked in
position P and the SmartKey will not turn in the
starter switch if the battery is disconnected or
discharged. For more information see “Battery”
(컄page 420) or “Jump starting” (컄page 423).
For information on manual unlocking of the gear
selector lever, see (컄page 398).
427
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compart-
ment under the trunk floor).
왘Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘Fit cover and snap into place.
Rear of vehicle
2Cover on right side of rear bumper
To remove cover:
왘Press mark on cover in the direction of
the arrow.
왘Fold cover down to reveal the threaded
hole for the towing eye bolt.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
tool kit (located in the storage compart-
ment under the trunk floor).
왘Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with lug wrench.
To reinstall cover:
왘Fit cover and snap into place.
428
Practical hints
Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If a fuse is blown, the components and sys-
tems secured by that fuse will stop operat-
ing.
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have
the cause determined and rectified by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following aids are available to help you
replace fuses:
앫Fuse chart
The fuse chart is located in the fuse box
in the passenger compartment
(컄page 429). The fuse chart explains
the fuse allocation and fuse amperag-
es.
앫Spare fuses
Spare fuses are located in the vehicle
tool kit in the trunk (컄page 393).
앫Fuse extractor
The fuse extractor is located in the ve-
hicle tool kit in the trunk (컄page 393).
The electrical fuses are located in different
fuse boxes:
앫Main fuse box in passenger compart-
ment (컄page 429)
앫Fuse box in trunk (컄page 429)
Before replacing fuses:
왘Apply the parking brake (컄page 59).
왘Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to position P (컄page 171).
왘Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘Turn off the engine (컄page 60).
왘Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘Open the driver’s door.
Warning! G
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system
in question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than ap-
proved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the
cause determined and remedied by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
iA blown fuse must be replaced by an appro-
priate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the
fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage
recommended in the fuse chart.
Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise
you on this subject.
429
Practical hints
Fuses
Main fuse box in passenger
compartment
1Cover
Opening
왘Open the front passenger door.
왘Insert flat, blunt object as a lever in into
on the edge of cover 1 at the position
indicated by the arrow.
왘Loosen cover 1 from the dashboard
using lever.
왘Using your hands, pull cover 1 in the
direction of the arrow and remove.
Closing
왘Hook cover 1 into the opening at the
front.
왘Press cover 1 back on until it engag-
es.
Fuse box in trunk
2Cover
3Catches
왘Turn catches 3 counter-clockwise
and remove cover 2.
!Do not use sharp objects such as a screw
driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the dash-
board, as this could damage it.
430
431
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions and weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
432
Technical data
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
Parts service
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine
Mercedes-Benz Parts required for mainte-
nance and repair work. In addition, strate-
gically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
!The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s du-
rability or safety.
433
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information Booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will ex-
change or repair any defective parts origi-
nally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
앫New Car Limited Warranty
앫Emission System Warranty
앫Emission Performance Warranty
앫California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories Warranties, copies of which
are available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a re-
placement. It will be mailed to you.
434
Technical data
Identification labels
1Certification label (includes Paintwork
code)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
can be found in the following locations:
앫on the Certification label
앫embossed underneath a cover in the
center armrest
앫on the lower edge of the windshield
Example Certification label (U.S. vehicles)
2VIN
3Paintwork code
Example Certification label
(Canada vehicles)
2VIN
3Paintwork code
iData shown on Certification label are for il-
lustration purposes only. These data are specific
to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustration. Refer to Certification label on ve-
hicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
435
Technical data
Identification labels
1Cover
2VIN
3Emission control information label, in-
cludes both federal and California cer-
tification exhaust emission standards
4Vacuum line routing diagram label
5VIN (lower edge of windshield)
6Engine number (engraved on engine)
iWhen ordering parts, please specify vehicle
identification and engine numbers.
436
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
CLS 550
1Idler pulley
2Idler pulley
3Automatic belt tensioner
4Power steering pump
5Air conditioning compressor
6Crankshaft
7Coolant pump
8Generator (alternator)
CLS 63 AMG
1Idler pulley
2Idler pulley
3Idler pulley
4Automatic belt tensioner
5Power steering pump
6Air conditioning compressor
7Crankshaft
8Coolant pump
9Generator (alternator)
437
Technical data
Engine
왔Engine
Model CLS 550 (219.3721)
1The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
CLS 63 AMG (219.3771)
Engine 273 156
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8 8
Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm) 4.02 in (102.20 mm)
Stroke 3.56 in (90.50 mm) 3.72 in (94.60 mm)
Total piston displacement 333.3 cu in (5461 cm3)378.8 cu in (6208 cm3)
Compression ratio 10.7:1 11.3:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 382 hp/6000 rpm2
(285 kW/6000 rpm)
507 hp/6800 rpm2
(378 kW/6800 rpm)
2Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 391lb-ft/2800rpm - 4800rpm
(530 Nm/2800 rpm - 4800 rpm)
468 lb-ft/5200 rpm
(635 Nm/5200 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6500 rpm 7200 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2404 mm 2369 mm
438
Technical data
Rims and tires
!Only use tires which have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by
Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best
possible performance in conjunction with the
driving safety systems on your vehicle such as
ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your
vehicle and tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the
following on the tire’s sidewall:
앫MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment
tires
AMG vehicles:
Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG
vehicles. For information on tested and ap-
proved tires for AMG vehicles, contact an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
앫MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires with limited run-flat characteristics)
original equipment tires
Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
iFor information on driving with MOExtended
tires, see “MOExtended system*” (컄page 313).
!Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects,
such as
앫poor handling characteristics
앫increased noise
앫increased fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimen-
sional variations and different tire deformation
characteristics that could cause them to come
into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts.
Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the re-
sult.
iFurther information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. A placard with the recommended tire in-
flation pressures is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental
tire inflation pressure information for driving at
high speeds (컄page 302) or for vehicle loads
less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition
(컄page 302). If such information is provided, it
can be found on the placard located on the in-
side of the fuel filler flap.
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly and should only be adjusted on cold
tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance
recommendation included with vehicle.
iThe following pages also list the approved
wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehi-
cles with winter tires. Winter tires are not avail-
able as standard or optional factory equipment,
but can be purchased from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Depending on vehicle model and the standard or
optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire config-
uration on your vehicle (Appearance Package,
AMG Sport Package etc.), equipping your vehicle
with winter tires approved for your vehicle model
may also require the purchase of two or four
wheel rims of the recommended size for use with
these winter tires. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for more information.
439
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
Model CLS 550
Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset (front axle) 1.38 in (28 mm)
Wheel offset (rear axle) 0.71 in (18 mm)
Summer tires1
1Radial-ply tires
-
Winter tires1,2
2Not available as factory equipment.
245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
!Winter tires on rims with different wheel
offset front vs. rear cannot be rotated.
440
Technical data
Rims and tires
Model CLS 550 (AMG Sport Package*) CLS 63 AMG
Rims (light alloy) 8.5Jx18H2 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 0.98 in (25 mm) 0.98 in (25 mm)
Summer tires1
1Radial-ply tires
– –
Winter tires1,2
2Not available as factory equipment.
245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S.245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
Model CLS 63 AMG (Performance Package*)
Rims (light alloy) 8.5Jx19H2
Wheel offset 0.98 in (25 mm)
Summer tires1
1Radial-ply tires
–
Winter tires1,2,3
2Not available as factory equipment.
3Maximum permissible vehicle speed of 137 mph (220 km/h).
245/35 R19 93V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
441
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
Model CLS 550 CLS 550 (AMG Sport Package*)
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy) 8.5Jx18H2 8.5Jx18H2
Wheel offset 1.10 in (28 mm) 0.98 in (25 mm)
Summer tires1
1Radial-ply tires
245/40 R18 93Y 255/40 ZR18 95Y
or
255/40 ZR18 99Y XL (Extra Load)
All-season tires1245/40 R18 93V M+S –
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy) 9.5Jx18H2 9.5Jx18H2
Wheel offset 1.30 in (33 mm) 1.10 in (28 mm)
Summer tires1,2
2Must not be used with snow chains.
275/35 R18 95Y 285/35 ZR18 97Y
or
285/35 ZR18 101Y XL (Extra Load)
All-season tires1,2275/35 R18 95V M+S –
442
Technical data
Rims and tires
Model CLS 63 AMG CLS 63 AMG*
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 0.98 in (25 mm) 0.98 in (25 mm)
Summer tires1
1Radial-ply tires
255/40 R18 99Y XL (Extra Load) 255/35 ZR19 96Y XL (Extra Load)
Winter tires – –
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 18 H2 9.5Jx19H2
Wheel offset 1.10 in (28 mm) 1.10 in (28 mm)
Summer tires1,2
2Must not be used with snow chains.
285/35 R18 101Y XL (Extra Load) 285/30 ZR19 98Y XL (Extra Load)
Winter tires – –
443
Technical data
Rims and tires
Model CLS 63 AMG (Performance Package*) CLS 63 AMG (Performance Package*)
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 19 H2 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 0.98 in (25 mm) 0.98 in (25 mm)
Summer tires1
1Radial-ply tires.
255/35 ZR19 96Y XL (Extra Load) –
Winter tires1,3 – 245/35 R19 93V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy) 9.5Jx19H2
or
10 J x 19 H2
9.5Jx19H2
Wheel offset 1.10 in (28 mm) 1.10 in (28 mm)
Summer tires1,2285/30 ZR19 98Y XL (Extra Load) –
Winter tires1,2,3
2Must not be used with snow chains.
3Not available as factory equipment.
– 275/30 R19 96Y XL (Extra Load) M+S.
444
Technical data
Rims and tires
MOExtended tires*
Model CLS 550
CLS 550 (AMG Sport Package*)
CLS 550
CLS 550 (AMG Sport Package*)
Front axle:
Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.10 in (28 mm) 1.10 in (28 mm)
Summer tires1,2
1Radial-ply tires.
2Must be used in conjunction with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles), Run Flat Indicator (Canada vehicles), or
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System* (Canada only).
245/40 R18 93Y MOExtended –
Winter tires1,2,3
3Not available as factory equipment.
– 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S.MOExtended
Rear axle:
Rims (light alloy) 9.5Jx18H2 8.5Jx18H2
Wheel offset 1.30 in (33 mm) 0.71 in (18 mm)
Summer tires1,2,4
4Must not be used with snow chains.
275/35 R18 95Y MOExtended –
Winter tires1,2,3 – 245/40 R18 97V XL (Extra Load) M+S .MOExtended
445
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
Model CLS 550 CLS 550 (AMG Sport Package*)
Rim 4.0Bx17H2 6.0Bx18H2
Wheel offset 1.34 in (34 mm) 0.98 in (25 mm)
Minispare tire1
1Must not be used with snow chains.
T 155/70 R17 110M –
Collapsible tire1 – 175/55-18 91P
446
Technical data
Rims and tires
Model CLS 63 AMG CLS 63 AMG (Performance Package*)
Rim 6.0 B x 18 H2 6.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset 0.98 in (25 mm) 0.55 in (14 mm)
Minispare tire – –
Collapsible tire1175/55-18 95P 175/50-19 97P
1Must not be used with snow chains.
!Please compare the recommended tire in-
flation pressure for your vehicle with the tire in-
flation pressure on the yellow label located on
the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the spare
wheel tire to the recommended tire inflation
pressure given on the yellow label on the spare
wheel rim.
iPlease note that the tire inflation pressure of
the Minispare tire and the collapsible tire differs
from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires.
Make sure the Minispare tire is inflated to ap-
proximately 61 psi (4.2 bar).
Inflate the collapsible tire to approximately
51 psi (3.5 bar).
447
Technical data
Electrical system
왔Electrical system
Model CLS 550 CLS 63 AMG
Generator (alternator) 14 V/180 A 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 14 V/1.7 kW 12 V/2.1 kW
Battery 12 V/95 Ah1
1Depending on production date, your vehicle may be equipped with a 12 V/100 Ah battery.
12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs Bosch F8 DPP 332U
NGK PFR 5R-11
NGK ILZKAR7A10
Electrode gap 0.039 in (1.00 mm) 0.039 in (1.00 mm)
Tightening torque 18.5 - 22 lb-ft (25 - 30 Nm) 15 - 18.5 lb-ft (20 -25 Nm)
448
Technical data
Main dimensions and weights
Main dimensions
Weights
Model CLS 550 CLS 63 AMG
Overall vehicle length 193.3 in (4910 mm) 193.5 in (4915 mm)
Overall vehicle width (exterior rear view
mirrors folded out)
81.1 in (2059 ) 81.1 in (2059 mm)
Overall vehicle height 55.7 in (1414 mm) 54.5 in (1389 mm)
Wheelbase 112.4 in (2854 mm) 112.4 in (2854 mm)
Track, front 62.5 in (1587 mm) 63 in (1599 mm)
Track, rear 61.8 in (1570 mm) 62.3 in (1583 mm)
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
449
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
왔Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet (USA only), or
inquire at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Warning! G
Comply with all valid regulations with re-
spect to handling, storing and disposing of
service fluids. Otherwise you could endan-
ger persons or the environment.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of chil-
dren.
For health reasons, you should prevent ser-
vice fluids from coming into direct contact
with your skin or clothing.
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a phy-
sician immediately.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine with oil filter CLS 550 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Approved engine oils
Engine with oil filter including
oil cooler
CLS 63 AMG 9.3 US qt (8.8 l) Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission CLS 550 9.7 US qt (9.2 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
CLS 63 AMG 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Rear axle CLS 550 1.37 US qt (1.3 l) Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90
CLS 63 AMG 1.27 US qt (1.2 l)
450
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Power steering CLS 550 approx. 1.0 US qt (0.9 l) MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S
or, depending on vehicle production date,
Chevron Texaco PSF 9109)1
1For detailed information, please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
CLS 63 AMG approx. 1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
Front wheel hubs CLS 550 approx. 3.0 oz (85 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
CLS 63 AMG approx. 3.2 oz (90 g) each
Brake system All models 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system CLS 550 11.9 US qt (11.3 l) MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
CLS 63 AMG 12.5 US qt (11.8 l)
Fuel tank All models 21.12 US gal (80.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline
Minimum Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
including a reserve of CLS 550 2.38 US gal (9.0 l)
CLS 63 AMG 3.7 US gal (14.0 l)
Air conditioning system All models R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer system All models 4.8 US qt (4.5 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate2
2Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄page 456).
Windshield washer and head-
lamp cleaning* system
All models 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
451
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for
our service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters re-
quired for vehicles with Maintenance Sys-
tem (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles). For a listing of approved engine
oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Ap-
proved Service Products pamphlet (USA
only), or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Engine oil additives
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air condition-
ing system.
Brake fluid
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will pro-
vide you with additional information.
!Using engine oils and oil filters of specifica-
tion other than those expressly required for the
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil
and oil filter at change intervals longer than
those called for by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles)
will result in engine or emission control system
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
ited Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System (U.S. vehi-
cles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) recommen-
dations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do
so could result in engine or emission control sys-
tem damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
!Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending
oil additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
!Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu-
bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the system
will occur.
Warning! G
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from the
atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous op-
erating conditions, this moisture content
can lead to the formation of bubbles in the
system, thus reducing the system’s efficien-
cy.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Mainte-
nance Booklet for replacement interval.
452
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements
Only use premium unleaded fuel:
The octane number (posted at the pump)
must be 91 min. It is an average of both the
Research Octane Number (RON) and the
Motor Octane Number (MON):
(RON+MON)/2. This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Warning! G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious per-
sonal injury.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate-
rials near gasoline!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in-
haling fumes and skin or clothing contact,
extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha-
lation of fuel vapors can damage your
health.
!To maintain the engine’s durability and per-
formance, premium unleaded gasoline must be
used. If premium unleaded gasoline is not avail-
able and low octane fuel is used, follow these
precautions:
앫Have the fuel tank only partially filled with
unleaded regular gasoline and fill up with
premium unleaded gasoline as soon as pos-
sible.
앫Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceler-
ation
앫Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm
if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such
as two persons and no luggage.
앫Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator
pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or
operating in mountainous terrain.
453
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufac-
turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso-
line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon depos-
its.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to
engine performance problems such as:
앫Warm-up hesitation
앫Unstable idle
앫Knocking/pinging
앫Misfire
앫Power loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasolines which contain these additives,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory
Approved Service Products Pamphlet (USA
only) or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for a listing of ap-
proved product(s). Follow directions on
product label.
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
This only results in unnecessary costs and
may be harmful to the engine operation.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which pro-
vides:
앫Corrosion protection
앫Freeze protection
앫Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corro-
sion protection.
!Damage or malfunction resulting from poor
fuel quality or from blending additional fuel addi-
tives other than those tested and approved by us
for use on Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet
are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
For a listing of approved products, refer to the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet
(USA only) or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
!Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding
water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
separately from each other, could cause engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
ited Warranty.
454
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool-
ant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase boil-over protec-
tion. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for re-
placement interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solu-
tion or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see
Factory Approved Service Products pam-
phlet) are used to renew the coolant con-
centration or bring it back up to the proper
level.
For information on other Mercedes-Benz
approved products of equal specification,
refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet (USA only) or contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 50% anticor-
rosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approximately -35°F
[-30°C]). If you use a solution that is more
than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze
protection to approximately -49°F
[-45°C]), the engine temperature will in-
crease due to the lower heat transfer capa-
bility of the solution. Therefore, do not use
more than this amount of anticorro-
sion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
should be used to bring it up to the proper
level (have cooling system checked for
signs of leakage). Please make sure the
mixture is in accordance with label instruc-
tions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, con-
sult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
455
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of alumi-
num parts. The use of aluminum compo-
nents in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifical-
ly formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. Failure to use such anticorro-
sion/antifreeze coolant will result in a sig-
nificantly shortened service life.
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection
-35°F (-37°C) -49°F (-45°C)
CLS 550 6.0 US qt (5.7 l) 6.6 US qt (6.2 l)
CLS 63 AMG 6.2 US qt (5.9 l) 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
456
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Windshield washer system and head-
lamp cleaning system*
Both the windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system* are supplied from the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of
approximately 6.9 US qt. (6.5 l).
왘Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or con-
centrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer sol-
vent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and water:
앫1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gallon [4.0 l] water).
For temperatures below freezing point use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and commercially avail-
able premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze:
앫1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gallon [4.0 l] solvent).
Warning! G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You can be seriously burned.
457
Index
A
ABS 91
Indicator lamp 342
Messages in display 358, 372
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission 175
Accessory weight 323
Accident 58
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps see Head-
lamps
Active head restraints 83
resetting 401
Adaptive Damping System 231
Adjusting 41
ADS 231
Air bags 66
Children 67
Front, Driver 69
Front, Passenger 69
Knee bag 70
Safety guidelines 68
Side impact 70
Window curtain 70
Air conditioning refrigerant 451
Air conditioning system see Climate con-
trol system 203
Air conditioning, Cooling 194, 203
Air distribution 197
Air pressure 323
Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure
Air pump, electric 417
Air recirculation mode 200
Air vents 191
Air volume 198
Airmatic DC (Dual Control) 231
Message in display 389, 390
Suspension tuning 231
Vehicle level control 231
Alarm
Audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps (Panic alarm) 90
Canceling 100
Visual 99
Alarm system see Anti-theft systems
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 393, 415
AMG menu 147
Lap analysis 150
Overall analysis 150
RACETIMER 148
Vehicle supply voltage 148
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 455
Antilock Brake System see ABS
Anti-theft systems 99
Anti-theft alarm system 99
Immobilizer 99
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Ashtrays 249
Aspect ratio 323
AUDIO menu 150
Audio search function 165
Audio system
CD mode 151
Selecting radio station 151
Selecting satellite radio station* 151
Auto-dimming, Rear view mirrors 185
Automatic central locking, Control
system 165
458
Index
Automatic climate control (4-zone) 190
Air recirculation mode 200
Deactivating 195
Rear window defroster 189
Setting the temperature 197
Automatic headlamp mode 129
Automatic lighting control, Interior
lighting 135
Automatic locking when driving 165
Automatic shift program 177
Automatic transmission
Accelerator position 175
Automatic shift program 177
Emergency operation (limp-home
mode) 184
Gear ranges 176
Gear selector lever 171
Gear selector lever control one-touch
gearshifting 178
Gear selector lever positions 173
Gear shifting malfunctions 184
Kickdown 175
Kickdown, manual shift program
CLS 63 AMG 183
Manual shift program
CLS 63 AMG 181
Program mode selector switch 177
Shifting procedure 172
Starting the engine 51
Steering wheel gearshift control
one-touch gearshifting* 179
Auxiliary bulbs 404
Messages in display 381
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 76
Self-test 77
Backrest
Seat 42
Seat, multicontour* 122
Backup lamps see Reverse lamps
Bar 323
BAS 92
Batteries, SmartKey
Checking battery condition 110
Replacing 402
Batteries, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Checking battery condition 110
Replacing 402
Batteries, vehicle 420
Charging 422
Disconnecting 421
Jump starting 423
Messages in display 370, 371
Reconnecting 422
Reinstalling 422
Removing 421
Bead 323
Beverage holder see Cup holders
Bi-Xenon headlamps see
Headlamps 128
Block heater* (Canada only) 328
Brake fluid
Checking 285
Brake lamps
Cleaning lenses 336
Replacing bulbs 406
Brake pads
Message in display 371
Brakes
High-performance brake system
(CLS 63 AMG only) 274
Warning lamp 344
Break-in period 270
Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs
459
Index
C
California retail buyers and lessees, impor-
tant notice for 11
Can holder see Cup holders
Capacities and recommended
fuels/lubricants 449
Cargo tie-down rings 243
Carpets, cleaning 339
Catalytic converter 281
CD player 151
Center console
Lower part 30
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp 353
Upper part 29
Central locking
Automatic 118
Locking/unlocking from inside 118
Switching on/off (control
system) 165
Central locking switch 118
Certification label 300
Checking tire pressure electronically with
the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System* (Advanced TPMS*), (Canada
only) 309
Checking tire pressure electronically with
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), (USA only) 306
Children in the vehicle 84
Air bags 67
Indicator lamp, front passenger front
air bag 76
Infant and child restraint systems 84
LATCH-type child seat anchors 88
Override switch for rear passenger
compartment 89
Cigarette lighter 250
Climate control system
Air conditioning refrigerant 451
Air conditioning, Cooling 203
Air distribution 197
Air recirculation mode 200
Air volume 198
Automatic mode 196
Control panel, Rear 204
Deactivating system 196
Front defroster 199
Maximum cooling MAX COOL 200
Rear climate control 204
Residual engine heat (REST) 203
Clock 27, 159
Setting time 159
Cockpit 24
Cold tire inflation pressure 323
Collapsible tire
Inflating 416
Collapsible wheel chock 395
COMAND see separate operating instruc-
tions
Combination filter with pollutant-sensitive
air-recirculation mode 202
Combination switch 55, 132
Control system 141
Functions 145
Multifunction display 141
Multifunction steering wheel 142
Resetting to factory default 155
Control system menus 144, 145
AUDIO 150
Distronic* 153
NAV* 152
Settings 154
Standard display 147
TEL* 168
Trip computer 167
Vehicle status message memory 153
460
Index
Control system submenus
Convenience 165
Instrument cluster 157
Lighting 161
Time/Date 159
Vehicle 164
Convenience submenu 165
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature* 166
Setting parking position for exterior
rear view mirror 166
Coolant
Checking level 290
Messages in display 373, 374, 375
Temperature 282
Temperature indicator 139
Warning lamp 347
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 132
Cruise control 215
Canceling 217
Driving downhill 216
Driving uphill 216
Fine adjustment 218
Lever 224
Saving current speed 216
Setting speed 216
Cruise control lever 215, 224
Cup holders 247
Curb weight 323
D
Date display, setting 160, 161
Daytime running lamp mode 130
Setting 161
Deceleration
With Distronic* 222
Deep water see Standing water
Defogging windshield 199
Defrosting
Front 199
Rear window 189
Delayed shut-off
Exterior lamps 163
Interior lighting 164
Department of Transportation see DOT
Dialing
A number (telephone) 170
Difficulties
While driving 58
With starting 52
Digital clock see Clock
Digital speedometer 147
Dimensions, vehicle 448
Direction of rotation (tires) 295
Displays
Digital speedometer 147
Distronic* 221
Maintenance service indicator
message 329
Messages in display 356
Multifunction display 141
Outside temperature 141, 158
Selecting 158
Symbol messages 370
Text messages 358
Vehicle status message memory 153
Vehicle system settings, Control
system 154
Distance
Decreasing in Distronic* 227
Increasing in Distronic* 227
Warning function 227
Distance to empty (range)
Trip computer 167
461
Index
Distronic* 218
Activating/deactivating 223
Cleaning system sensor 336
Control system 153
Distance warning function 227
Driving hints 228
Intermittent warning sound 227
Menu 223
Messages in display 359, 360
Sensor cover 336
Symbol in multifunction display 153
Warning and indicator lamps 221
Door
Entry lamps 137
Locking/unlocking, SmartKey 104
Locking/unlocking, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* 108
Message in display 370
Opening from inside/outside 111
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 262
Door control panel 34
Door handle, inside 34
DOT 323
Drinking and driving 271
Driving
Abroad 280
Hydroplaning 276
In winter 278
Instructions 48
Problems 58
Safety systems 91
Systems 215
Through standing water 279
With Distronic* 218
Driving off 274
Driving safety systems
ABS 91
BAS 92
EBP 93
Electronic traction system 95
ESP®94
Driving systems 215
Airmatic DC 231
Cruise control 215
Distronic* 218
Parktronic* 235
Driving tips 175
Accelerator position 175
Kickdown 175
Dual control
Airmatic DC 231
E
Easy-entry/exit feature* 45, 166
EBP 93
Electric air pump 416
Electrical fuses see Fuses
Electrical system, Technical data 447
Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Emergency calls
Tele Aid calls 258
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) 184
Emergency operations
Fuel filler flap 398
Gear selector lever, Unlocking 398
Locking/unlocking the vehicle 396
Power tilt/sliding sunroof, manual
operation 400
Remote door unlock 262
Trunk lid, Releasing from inside 116
Trunk lid, Unlocking 112
462
Index
Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD
Emergency, In case of
Batteries, Jump starting 423
First aid kit 391
Flat tire, changing 412
Fuses 428
Hazard warning flasher 134
Instrument cluster, indicator
lamps 342
Roadside Assistance 12
Towing the vehicle 342
Emission control 281
Information label 435
System warranties 10
Vacuum line routing diagram
label 435
Engine 437
Belt layout 436
Block heater* (Canada only) 328
Break-in recommendations 270
Cleaning 334
Compartment 286
Malfunction indicator lamp 345, 346,
373
Maximum engine speed 437
Number 434, 435
Starting 51
Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 52
Tachometer 27
Technical data 437
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* 61
Turning off with the SmartKey 61
Engine compartment
Hood 286
Engine coolant see Coolant 290
Engine oil 287, 449
Adding 289
Additives 451
Changing 451
Checking level 288
Consumption 287
Filler neck 289
Messages in display 377
Oil dipstick 288
Recommended engine oils and oil
filters 451
ESP®94
Messages in display 358, 372
Warning lamp 343
ETD
Safety guidelines 68
Exterior lamp switch 128
Exterior rear view mirrors 47
Parking position 166, 187
Exterior view 22
F
Factory settings
Resetting 155
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 108
Filler neck, Engine oil 289
First aid kit 391
Flat tire 412
Collapsible tire 415, 416
Jacking up the vehicle 414
Lowering the vehicle 418
Mounting the spare wheel 412, 415
Preparing the vehicle 412
Spare wheel 412
463
Index
Flexible Service System see FSS PLUS
Floormats 253
Fluids
Automatic transmission fluid 449
Brake fluid 450
Capacities 449
Engine coolant 450
Engine oil 449
Power steering fluid 450
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system 450
Fog lamp, rear 131
Fog lamps 131
Messages in display 380, 381, 382,
383, 384
Fog lamps, front
Corner-illuminating* 132
Switching on 131
Front air bags 69
Front lamps see Headlamps
Front passenger front air bag
Messages in display 353
Front passenger front air bag off indicator
lamp 70, 75
Front seat head restraints see Head re-
straints
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) 330
Fuel
Additives 453
Capacities, Fuel tank 450
Filler flap and cap 283
Filling the tank 283
Fuel reserve warning lamp 348
Premium unleaded gasoline 284
Requirements
Gasoline additives 453
Premium unleaded gasoline 452
Fuel consumption statistics
Since last reset 167
Since start 167
Fuel filler flap 283
Locking/unlocking 283
Opening 283
Fuel tank
Capacity 283
Filler flap 283
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 449
Fuse box in trunk 429
Fuses 428
Aids for replacing fuses 428
Fuse box (main) in passenger
compartment 429
Fuse box in trunk 429
Fuse chart 428
Fuse extractor 428
Replacing 428
Spare fuses 428
G
Garage door opener 263
Gasoline see Fuel
GAWR 323
Gear range
Automatic transmission 176
Limiting 176
Shifting into optimal 179, 181
Gear selector lever 171
Cleaning 339
Gearshift pattern 171
Lock 51
Position 172, 173
Shifting procedure 172
Unlocking in an emergency 398
464
Index
Gear selector lever one-touch gearshifting
Automatic transmission 178
Global locking 104
Global locking/unlocking see Key, Smart-
Key or Key, SmartKey with KEY-
LESS-GO*
Glove box 244
Good visibility 185
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
GVW 323
GVWR 324
H
Halogen headlamps see Headlamps
Hands-free microphone 31
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 339
Hazard warning flasher 134
Head restraints 120
Active head restraints 83
Comfort head restraint*,
Adjusting 43
Folding back 121
Front seat, Adjusting 43
Front seat, Removing
Rear seat, Removing and
installing 120
Headlamp cleaning system* 185
Headlamp shut off delay see Delayed
shut-off, Exterior lamps 163
Headlamps
Automatic headlamp mode 129
Bi-Xenon headlamps, Active 128
Cleaning lenses 336
Cleaning system* 185
Halogen 405
High beam 55
High beam flasher 55
High beam see High beam headlamps
Low beam 55
Manual headlamp mode 129
Replacing bulbs 404
Switch 55
Headliner and shelf below rear window,
cleaning 339
Heated seats* 123
Heated steering wheel (Canada
only) 252
Height adjustment
Head restraints 43
Seats 42
Steering wheel 44
Vehicle level control 232
High beam flasher 55, 132
High beam headlamps
Replacing bulbs 408
Switching on 55, 132
High mounted brake lamp 406
High-performance brake system
(CLS 63 AMG only) 274
Hood 286
Message in display 370
Horn 25
HVAC see Climate control system
Hydroplaning 276
465
Index
I
Identification labels 434
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) 435
Ignition 38, 40
Immobilizer 99
Indicator lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Infant and child restraint systems see Chil-
dren in the vehicle
Inflation pressure see
Tires, Inflation pressure 301
Information button (Tele Aid) 261
Inside door handle 111
Installing
Wiper blades 411
Instrument cluster 26, 138
Coolant temperature indicator 139
Illumination brightness 138
Lamps 342
Messages in the multifunction
display 356
Multifunction display 141
Outside temperature indicator 140
Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster,
Illumination brightness 138
Instrument panel see Instrument
cluster 138
Instruments and controls see
Cockpit 138
Interior lighting 135
Delayed shut-off 164
Interior rear view mirror 47, 185
Auto dimming 185
Interior storage space see Storage com-
partments
J
Jack 394
Jacking up the vehicle 414
Jump starting 423
K
Key, Mechanical 396
Loss of 110
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp 105
Checking batteries 110
Factory setting 103
Global locking 104, 105
Global unlocking 104
Locking/unlocking 102, 105
Loss of 110
Messages in display 378
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof 210
Opening and closing the
windows 210
Remote control 102
Replacing batteries 402
Restoring to factory setting 105
Selective setting 104
Starter switch positions 38
Starting the engine 51, 52
Turning off the engine 60
466
Index
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Battery check lamp 105
Checking batteries 110
Factory setting 108
Global locking 108, 109
Global unlocking 108, 109
Locking/unlocking 105
Locking/unlocking, Selective
setting 109
Loss of 110
Messages in display 378, 379, 380,
383
Opening and closing the power
tilt/sliding sunroof 210
Opening and closing the
windows 210
Opening the trunk 112
Remote control 105
Replacing batteries 402
Restoring to factory setting 109
Selective setting 109
Starter switch positions 39
Starting the engine 52
Turning off engine 61
Turning off the engine 61
KEYLESS-GO* see Key, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*
Kickdown 175
Kilopascal 324
Knee bag 70
L
Labels
Certification 434
Emission control information 435
Vacuum line routing diagram 435
Lamp bulbs, exterior 404
Lamps, exterior
Front 405
Messages in display 380
Rear 406
Replacing bulbs 404
Switching on/off 128
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 27, 342
Air bag off 70
Battery (SmartKey) 104
Brakes 344
CHECK ENGINE 27, 345, 346
Coolant 347
Distance warning lamp* 221, 227
Engine diagnostics 345, 346
Engine malfunction 27, 345, 346
ESP®27, 343
Fog lamps 131
Front passenger front air bag off 29,
76, 353, 354
Fuel reserve 27, 348
High beam headlamps 27
Instrument cluster 342
Seat belt telltale 27, 348, 349
SRS 65
Turn signals 27
Language, Setting 157
LATCH type child seat anchors 88
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 436
License plate lamps 406
Messages in display 383
Replacing bulbs 409
Light alloy wheels, cleaning 338
Lighter see Cigarette lighter
467
Index
Lighting 128
Automatic headlamp mode 129
Combination switch 132
Daytime running lamp mode 130
Door entry lamps 137
Exterior lamp switch 128
Front fog lamps 131
High beams 132
Instrument cluster illumination 138
Interior 135
Locator lighting 131
Low beam 128
Manual headlamp mode 129
Night security illumination 131
Parking lamps 128
Rear fog lamp 131
Settings (control system) 161
Trunk lamp 137
Limp-home mode 184
Loading see Vehicle loading
Loading the vehicle 296
Locator lighting 131, 162
Lock button (KEYLESS-GO*)
Door handle 62
Trunk lid 109
Locking the vehicle 59
In an emergency 397
Locking/Unlocking, SmartKey 36, 104
Locking/Unlocking, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* 37
Loss of
Key, Mechanical 110
Key, SmartKey 110
Key, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* 110
Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 433
Low beam headlamps 55
Replacing bulbs 408
Switching on 55
Lubricants 449
Lumbar support 121
M
Main Dimensions 448
Maintenance 12
Calling up service indicator 331
Clearing service indicator
message 330
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) 330
Maintenance System 330
Resetting service indicator 331
Service indicator message 329
Service term exceeded 330
Manual headlamp mode 129
Manual shift program CLS 63 AMG 181
Deactivating 183
Maximum load rating, Tires 324
Maximum loaded vehicle weight 324
Maximum tire inflation pressure 324
Mechanical key 396
Memory functions 125
Menus see Control system menus
Microphone, Hands-free 31
468
Index
Minispare wheel see Spare wheel 391
Mirrors
Adjusting 46
Auto-dimming 185
Exterior rear view mirror 47
Exterior rear view mirror parking
positions 166, 187
Interior rear view mirror 47
Storing exterior mirror parking
position 127
Mobile phone see Telephone*
MOE tires* see MOExtended system*
MOExtended system* 313, 419
MOExtended tires* 313, 444
MON 284
MP3
Selecting track 152
Multicontour seat* 122
Multifunction display 141
Changing settings see Control system
menus and Control system
submenus 141
Selecting language 157
Multifunction display messages
ABS 358, 372
Airmatic DC 389, 390
Brake fluid 372
Brake pads 371
Check engine 345, 346
Coolant 373, 374, 375
Cruise control 359
Distronic* 359
Door 370
Engine oil 377
ESP®358, 361, 372
Fog lamps 380, 381, 382, 383, 384
Hood 370
Light sensor 383
Parking brake 372
Parking lamps 382
PRE-SAFE®358, 366
Reserve fuel 378
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 378,
379, 380
SRS 386
Taillamps 384, 385
Tele Aid 386
Telephone* 389
Tires 388
Trunk 370
Turn signals 385
Windshield washer fluid 389
Multifunction steering wheel 28, 142
Button operation 142
N
NAV* menu (Control system) 152
Navigation system see separate COMAND
operating instructions
Net, parcel 246
Neutral gear position, Automatic
transmission 171, 173
Night security illumination 131
Normal occupant weight 324
Number, Vehicle Identification (VIN) 434
469
Index
O
Occupant Classification System see OCS
Occupant distribution 324
Occupant safety 64
Air bags 66
Children and air bags 67
Children in the vehicle 84
Fastening the seat belt 48
Front passenger front air bag off indica-
tor lamp 75
Infant and child restraint systems 84
LATCH type child seat anchors 88
OCS 71
Seat belts 48, 68
OCS 71
Self-test 76
Odometer 27
Oil
Consumption 287
Oil see Engine oil
One-touch gearshifting
Gear selector lever 178
Steering wheel gearshift
control* 179
Operating safety 16
Ornamental moldings, cleaning 335
Outside temperature see Displays
Overdue maintenance service 329
Overhead control panel 31
P
Paintwork, Cleaning 334
Panic alarm 90
Parcel net
Front passenger footwell 246
Parking 59
On hills 59
Over things that burn, Potential
consequences 59
Parking brake 53, 59
Message in display 372
Parking lamps 405
Replacing bulbs 409
Parking position
Exterior rear view mirrors 127, 166
Gear position 51
Parktronic system (Parking assist)* see
Parktronic*
Parktronic* 235
Activating/deactivating 238
Cleaning system sensors 336
Malfunctioning 238
Minimum distance 236
Range 235
System sensors 336
Warning indicators 25, 237
Warning sounds 238
Parts service 432
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see
Front passenger front air bag off indica-
tor lamp
Passenger compartment
Interior lighting 135
Interior rear view mirror 47
Main fuse box 429
Parcel net in the front passenger
footwell 246
Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Pedals 271
Phone see Telephone*
Plastic parts, cleaning 338
470
Index
Pliers, universal (vehicle tool kit) 393
Poly-V-belt drive
Layout 436
Positions (Memory function) see Seats
Power assistance 272
Power outlet 251
Power seat see Seats 43
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 212
Opening/closing 212
Opening/closing in an
emergency 400
Stopping 214
Synchronizing 214
Power washer 333
Power windows 207
Cleaning 337
Operating 207
Rear door window, blocking
operation 89
Side windows 207
Synchronizing 209
Practical hints 342
PRE-SAFE®
Messages in display 358
Problems
While driving 58
With vehicle 17
Product information 9
Production options weight 324
Program mode see Automatic transmis-
sion, Automatic shift program
Program mode selector switch
Automatic shift program 177
PSI 324
Push-start see Tow-start
R
RACETIMER 148
Radio
Selecting stations 151
Selecting stations (satellite*) 151
Radio transmitters 280
Range (distance to empty) 168
Reading lamp
Front 135
Rear 136
Rear door ashtray see Ashtrays 250
Rear door window
Blocking operation 89
Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps
Rear lamp 406
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear seat head restraints see Head re-
straints
Rear storage compartment in the rear cen-
ter console 245
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window defroster 189
Rear window sunshade* 188
Recommended tire inflation
pressure 324
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle (Tele
Aid) 263
Refrigerant, Air conditioning 451
471
Index
Refueling 283
Regular checks 285
Reminder, seat belts see Seat belts, Tell-
tale
Remote control see Key, SmartKey
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) 262
Replacing bulbs
Additional turn signals 407
Brake lamps 407
Front lamps 407
Headlamps 405
High beam headlamps 408
High mounted brake lamp 407
License plate lamps 409
Low beam headlamps 408
Parking lamps 409
Side marker lamps 407
Tail lamps 409
Turn signal lamps 408
Reporting safety defects 18
Research octane number see RON
Reserve fuel
Message in display 378
Reset button in the instrument
cluster 138, 155
Reset tool (Active head restraints) 401
Restraint system see Children in the vehi-
cle
Retaining hooks 243
Reverse gear position, Automatic
transmission 171, 173
Rims 324, 438
Roadside assistance 12
Button 260
RON 284
Roof rack* 239
Rotating tires 326
Rubber parts, cleaning 338
Run Flat Indicator* 304
S
Safety
Driving safety systems 91
Occupant 64
Reporting defects 18
Safety belts see Seat belts
Satellite radio* 151
Seat belt force limiter 81
Seat belts 78
Children in the vehicle 84
Cleaning 339
Fastening 48
Height adjustment 50
Proper use of 50, 79
Safety guidelines 68
Telltale 27, 348, 349
Warning lamp 348, 349
Seating capacity 297
Seats 41, 120
Adjusting 41
Easy entry/exit feature* 45
Heater* 123
Memory function 125
Multicontour seat* 122
Ventilation* 124
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings 243
Selecting display 158
472
Index
Selective setting see Key, SmartKey or
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Selector lever see Gear selector lever
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 77
OCS 76
Tele Aid 258
Service and warranty information 10
Service intervals see Maintenance, Service
indicator
Service life
Tires 294
Service see Maintenance
Service system see FSS PLUS (Canada ve-
hicles) or Maintenance system (US vehi-
cles)
Service, Parts 432
Settings 108, 154
Control system menus and
submenus 143
Date 160
Individual, Vehicle 154
Memory function 126
Resetting all, Control system 155
Selective, SmartKey 104
Selective, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* 109
Suspension tuning 231
Temperature (interior) 197
Time 159
Settings menu
Functions in 154
Submenus 155
Shelf below rear window, cleaning 339
Shift program mode, Automatic
transmission 177
Shifting, Automatic transmission 171
Side impact air bags 70
Side marker lamps
Cleaning lenses 336
Side windows
Synchronizing power windows 209
Side windows see Power windows
Sidewall 324
Ski bag* (Canada only) 240
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* see Key,
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Snow chains 328
Snow tires 327
Spare fuses 428
Spare wheel 391, 445
Mounting 412
Speed settings
Cruise control 215
Distronic* 224
473
Index
Speedometer 27
Selecting display mode 157
SRS 64
Indicator lamp 27, 350
Messages in display 386
Standing lamps 128
Standing water, Driving through 279
Starter switch 38
Starter switch positions 38
Starting difficulties 52
Starting position 38
Starting the engine
SmartKey 51
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 52
Steering wheel 28
Adjustment 44
Buttons 28
Cleaning 339
Steering wheel gearshift control one-touch
gearshifting*
Automatic transmission 179
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 263
Storage compartments 32, 244
Center armrest 244
Cup holder 247
Glove box 244
Parcel net in front passenger
footwell 246
Rear armrest 245
Rear center console 245
Ruffled storage bags 246
Under seat 245
Storing
Positions into memory (Memory
function*) 126
Tires 295
Submenus see Control system submenus
Substitute bulbs see Auxiliary bulbs
Sun visors 187
Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Sunshade*, rear window 188
Suspension tuning
For comfortable driving style 231
For sporty driving style 231
Symbols used in this operator’s
manual 15
T
Tachometer 27, 139
Overspeed range 139
Tail lamps
Messages in display 384, 385
Replacing bulbs 409
Tar stains 333
Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant 451
Brake fluid 451
Capacities fuels, lubricants etc. 449
Coolant 453
Dimensions 448
Electrical system 447
Engine 437
Engine oil additives 451
Engine oils 451
Fuel requirements 452
Gasoline additives 453
Premium unleaded gasoline 452
Rims and tires 438
Weights 448
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system 450
474
Index
Tele Aid 257
Emergency calls 258
Information 261
Initiating an emergency call
manually 259
Messages in display 386
Remote door unlock 262
Roadside assistance 260
SOS button 259
Stolen vehicle Recovery services 263
System self-check 258
Telephone cradle
Changing 256
Telephone* 28, 254
Answering/ending a call 169
Changing mobile phone cradle 256
Compartment 244
Hands-free microphone 31
Inserting in cradle 255
Installing a different mobile phone
cradle 256
Messages in the display 389
Operation 168
Phone book 170
Redialing 170
Removing from cradle 256
Temperature
Engine 54
Interior temperature 197
Outside temperature 158
Tether anchorage points, see Children in
the vehicle
Tie-down rings, Trunk 243
Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 418
Time
Setting 159
Synchronizing 159
TIN 325
Tire and Loading Information
Placard 296
Terminology 323
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 301
Placard on the fuel filler flap 297
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS),
(USA only)
Checking tire pressure
electronically 306
Tires
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System* (Advanced TPMS*) (Canada
only) 309
Advanced TPMS* malfunction
telltale 351
Air pressure 301
Care and maintenance 294
Cleaning 295
Combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale, USA only 27
Direction of rotation, Spinning 295
Driving instructions 275
Important notes, Tire inflation
pressure 302
Inflation pressure 301, 302
Information placard 297
Inspection 294
Load rating 325
Low tire pressure telltale* (Canada
only) 27, 351
Messages in display 367, 388
MOExtended* 313, 419
Ply composition and material
used 325
Problems with
under-/overinflation 312
Retreads 293
Rims and tires 438
Rotation 326
475
Index
Service life 294
Sizes 439
Snow 327
Snow chains 328
Spare wheel 391
Speed rating 316, 325
Storing 295
Temperature 302, 322
Terminology 323
Tire Identification Number see TIN
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) (USA only) 306
TPMS malfunction telltale 351
Traction 276, 321, 325
Tread 325
Tread depth 294, 327
Treadwear indicators 325
Vehicle maximum load on 325
Wear pattern 326
Winter 327
Tools 393
Top tether
Children in the vehicle 87
Total load limit 325
Towing eye bolt 426
Towing the vehicle 425
Tow-start 423, 425
Traction 325
Transmission fluid level 289
Transmission gear selector lever see Gear
selector lever
Transmission see Automatic transmission
Traveling abroad 280
Tread 325
Tread depth 294, 327
Tread depth (tires) 327
Treadwear indicators 325
Trip computer 167
Trip odometer
Resetting 139
Trunk
Closing the lid 113
Fuse box 429
Lamp 137
Lock button, KEYLESS-GO* 109
Message in display 370
Opening 112
Tie-down rings 243
Trunk lid emergency release 116
Unlocking in an emergency 397
Valet locking 117
Turn signals 55
Additional in mirrors 405
Bulbs 405
Cleaning lenses 336
Indicator lamps 27
Messages in display 385
Replacing bulbs 408
Turning off engine 60
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards 325
Units, Settings
Speedometer 157
Temperature 158
Unleaded gasoline, Premium 452
Unlocking 36
In an emergency 396
Mechanical Key 396
Uphill driving, Cruise control 216
Upholstery
Cleaning 339
Useful features 244
476
Index
V
Vacuum line routing diagram label 435
Valet locking 117
Vehicle
Battery 420
Care 332
Control system, settings menu 141
Dimensions 448
Individual settings 154
Locking/unlocking 102
Locking/unlocking in an
emergency 396, 397
Lowering 418
Modifications and alterations, operat-
ing safety 16
Towing 425
Washing 334
Weights 448
Vehicle jack 394
Vehicle level control see Airmatic DC (Dual
Control)
Vehicle lighting
Checking 285
Vehicle loading
Cargo tie-down rings 243
Instructions 239
Load limit 296
Roof rack* 239
Ski bag* 240
Terminology 323
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 325
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen (Tele
Aid) 263
Vehicle status message memory 153
Vehicle tool kit 393
Vehicle washing 332
W
Warning lamps see Lamps, indicator and
warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function* 227
Distronic* 222
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt 80
Parking brake 53
Parktronic* 235
Seat belt telltale 349
Warranty coverage 433
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washer reservoir level 292
Washing the vehicle 332
Wear pattern, Tires 326
Weights, Vehicle 448
Wheel
Change 412
Removing 415
Spare 391
Tightening torque 418
Wheels, Sizes 439
Wheels, Tires and 293
Window curtain air bags 70
Windows see Power windows
Windows, cleaning 337
Windshield
Cleaning wiper blades 337
Defogging 199
Windshield washer fluid 292
Messages in display 389
Refilling 292
Wiping 58
477
Index
Windshield washer system 58
Windshield wipers 56
Cleaning wiper blades 337
Replacing wiper blades 410, 411
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 58
Winter driving
Block heater* (Canada only) 328
Snow chains 328
Tires 327
Winter driving instructions 278
Winter tires 327
Wood trims, cleaning 340
X
Xenon headlamps see Headlamps,
Bi-Xenon
478
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator's Manual might differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time August 02, 2006
GSP/TIP
Printed in U. S. A.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Navigation menu